15 & 150-Model B Connection Manual (Hardware) GFZ-62073EN PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 15 / 150 Model B

Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-62073E/04
November 1998
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
B62073E/04
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s1
B62073E/04
Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.1
Cabinet Exterior Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.2
Installation Conditions of the CNC Inside Cabinet and Servo Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CABINET DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF
THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.1
Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.2
Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5.1
Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.3.2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6.1
Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6.2
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.6.3
Grounding Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.6.4
Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.6.5
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.1
Configuration and Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.2
Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.7.3
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CABLE LEADIN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8.1
Configuration of Control Unit Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8.2
Cable Leadin for Standalone Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.8.3
Cable Leadin for Standalone Cabinet B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.8.4
Cable Leadin for Additional Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
MAINTENANCE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.9.1
Maintenance Area for Selfstanding A Type Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.9.2
Maintenance Area for Selfstanding B Type Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.9.3
Maintenance Area for Additional Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,

SERIES 150TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.1
Connection Diagram for Series 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, Series 150TB/MB/TTB
(When LCD/MDI Unit with Builtin Graphic Functions is not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.2
Connection Diagram for Series 15TB/TTB/MB
(When LCD/MDI Unit with Builtin Graphic Functions is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
c1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
B62073E/04
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,

SERIES 150TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF ANALOG SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15MB OR SERIES 150MB
(IN CASE OF MULTIPLE AXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2
Additional Cabinet (In Case of Serial Spindle Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3
Additional Cabinet (In Case of Analog Spindle Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4
Connection Between the Control Unit and Additional Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15B (IN CASE OF MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15B (IN CASE OF MMCIII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
83
84
85
86
88
89
91
92
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

5.1
5.2
POWER SUPPLY UNIT PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.1
When an Input Unit is not Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.2
When an Input Unit is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2.3
When AC Output Terminals for Which Power On/Off is Controlled are Insufficient . . . . . . . 103
5.2.4
Power ON Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.5
Power OFF Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.3
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.1
Input Unit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.2
Connection to Input Units (A14B0076B004, B005, and B008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.3
Connection to the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.4
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.4.1
5.4.2
Connection to Input Unit (A14B0076B411) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.4.3
Connection to Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.5
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR ADDITIONAL CABINET A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.5.1
5.5.2
Cable Connection
[Connection to the Input Unit (A02B0075J141, J142, J144, and J145)] . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.1
6.2
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNITMODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1
Structure of FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2
Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3
Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4
Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5
Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.7
Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.8
Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2
121
123
125
126
131
131
132
132
134
135
136
138
141
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62073E/04
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.3.9
Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.11 Number of I/O Points for I/O UnitMODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTING THE CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Connecting Connection Unit 1 and Connection Unit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2
Input Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3
Output Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4
Connector Pin Assignment for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.5
Details of the Connection between the Connection Unit and the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.6
External View of the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF OPERATORS PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Input Signal Regulations for the Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2
Output Signal Regulations for the Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3
Connector Layout for Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4
Details of the Connection between the Operators Panel Connection Unit and the Machine .
6.5.5
External View of Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT OPERATORS PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . .
6.6.1
Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit Input Signal Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2
Output Signal Standard for Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3
ALARM LEDs on Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4
Connector Pin Assignment Addresses of Source Output
Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.5
Details of Machine Side Connections of Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit .
6.6.6
External Dimensions of Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDRESSFIXED SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
145
145
147
149
151
153
154
156
174
175
176
177
179
181
188
189
190
192
195
197
199
206
207
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
9 CRT or 9 PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Noncompliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
9 CRT or PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
14 Analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD Display Interface
(CE Marking Compliant when MMCIV is not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
14 Analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD Display Interface
(CE Marking Compliant when MMCIV is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
10.4 LCD Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant with Builtin Graphic Function) . . . .
7.1.7
Adjusting the Flat Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.8
Interface between MMCIV Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.9
Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.10 Small 9 Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.11 Interface between MMCIII Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
I/O DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
RS232C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
PPR Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3
Portable Tape Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4
FANUC Cassette Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5
Connection with the FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6
Connection of Tape Reader Without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7
Connection of Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.8
RS422 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c3
209
209
214
216
218
220
222
224
225
226
227
228
229
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B62073E/04
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS232C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIGHSPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF REFERENCE POSITION APPROACH SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNC INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.1
DNC1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2
DNC2 Interface (RS232C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.3
DNC2 Interface (RS422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9
SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.1
Serial Spindle Interface (S Series Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.2
Serial Spindle Interface ( Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.3
Analog Spindle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.4
Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2 Servo Amp Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.3 Serial Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.4 Linear Scale Interface (A/B/Z Signal Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.5 Linear Scale Interface (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.6 APC Battery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.7 Hybridcontrol Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11
GENERALPURPOSE ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.12 CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SERIES 15B (MMCII) AND PERIPHERAL UNITS . . . . . .
7.13 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING THE RS422 INTERFACE
FOR SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.14 CONNECTION WITH A PRINTER USING THE CENTRONICS INTERFACE
FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTENSION ADAPTOR UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.16 CONNECTION WITH A HARD DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . .
7.17 CONNECTION WITH A FLOPPY DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . .
7.18 RS232C SERIAL PORT (MMCIII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.19 OUTER HARD DISK INTERFACE (MMCIII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
238
240
242
244
247
248
248
250
251
252
254
255
256
257
259
259
260
263
269
271
272
273
274
275
277
279
281
283
287
290
292
8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
APPENDIX
A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
C. 20PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
D. ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
c4
1. GENERAL
B62073E/04
GENERAL
Contents of this manual
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

for connecting the CNC control units, FANUC Series 15MODEL
B/Series 150MODEL B, with a machine tool, and covers the equipment
shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2. When using the CNC
control units, be sure to connect and install them following the
instructions in this manual. The manual outlines the units commonly used
for Fanuc CNC control units, that is, the I/O unit, servo motor, spindle
motor, and so on, and describes additional information on using these
units for the Series 15/150B. Refer to individual manuals for the
detailed specifications of each unit.
Multiple models of Series 15/150B products are provided so that they
correspond to various machine tools (lathe, machining center, etc.),
respectively. The description in this manual is common to these models.
Whenever each model has different restrictions, the abbreviation of the
model and notes are described. See the following table for the names and
abbreviations of the models described in this manual.
How this manual is

organized
This manual comprises the following chapters and appendix.

1. GENERAL
This chapter. It describes the outline and organization of this manual,
names of models applied and other related manuals.
2. CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the configuration of the electrical system of the
machine tool with which the CNC is used.
3. INSTALLATION
This chapter describes how to install the CNC.
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
This chapter shows the connection diagrams for the CNC and each
device.
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION
This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the power supply
unit and input unit.
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the I/O unit to
machine interface.
1
1. GENERAL
B62073E/04
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to peripherals.
APPENDIX
This appendix contains an explanation of the CNC control unit,
external dimensions of the display apparatus and details on the 20pin
interface connectors and cables.
Applicable models
This manual can be used with the following models.

The abbreviated names may be used.
Product Name
Abbreviations
FANUC Series 15TB
15TB
FANUC Series 15TFB
15TFB
FANUC Series 15TEDMODEL B4
(*1)
15TED
FANUC Series 15TEEMODEL B4
(*1)
15TEE
FANUC Series 15TEFMODEL B4
(*1)
15TEF
FANUC Series 15MB
15MB
FANUC Series 15MFB
15MFB
FANUC Series 15MEKMODEL B4
(*1)
15MEK
FANUC Series 15MELMODEL B4
(*1)
15MEL
FANUC Series 15TTB
15TTB
FANUC Series 15TTFB
15TTFB
FANUC Series 150TB
150TB
FANUC Series 150TTB
150TTB
FANUC Series 150MB
150MB
Series 15B
Series 150B
(*1) With 15TED, 15TEE, and 15TEF, some options are not available.
Moreover, the following PC boards cannot be used:
D SubCPU board
D RISC board
D OSI ethernet board
(*2) The MMC board can be used only with the Series 150.
(*3) See FANUC MMC-IV Connection and Maintenance Manual
(B-62493E) for connection related to MMC-IV.
1. GENERAL
B62073E/04
Manuals related to
Series 15/150MODEL B
Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B are as follows.

This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
List of manuals related to Series 15/150MODEL B

Specification
Number
Manual Name
FANUC Series 15TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS
B62072E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS
B62082E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
B62073E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface)
B62073E1
FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)
B62554E
FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)
B62554E1
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)
B62564E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)
B62564E1
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL
B62560E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B62075E
FANUC Series 15MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer)
B62072E1
FANUC Series 15MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)
B62073E2
PMC
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language)
B61013E
FANUC PMCMODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language)
B61863E
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)
B61013E2
FANUC PMCMODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)
B61863E1
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA

PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language Tool Management Library)
B61013E4
Conversational Automatic Programming Function

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
(Series 15MF/MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B61263E
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER

(Series 15MF/MFB) OPERATORS MANUAL
B61264E
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE

(Series 15TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL
B61234E
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE

(Series 15TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL
B61804E2
Tracing / Digitizing
FANUC Series 15MB DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)
B62472E
FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)
B62473E
FANUC Series 15MB OPERATORS MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)
B62474E
Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine

FANUC Series 15MB DESCRIPTIONS (FOR GAS, LASER PLASMA CUTTING MACHINE)
B62082EN1
MultiTeaching Function
FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (MultiTeaching Function)
B62083E1
Multipleaxis and Multiplepath Control Function

FANUC Series 15TTB OPERATORS MANUAL
(Supplement Explanations for Multipleaxis and Multiplepath Control Function)
B62074E1
2. CONFIGURATION
B62073E/04
CONFIGURATION
The following figure (see next page) shows the configuration of the
electrical system of the machine tool with which the Series 15B is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operators panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builders responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool.
The numbers in parentheses shown in the diagram are section references
for this manual.
2. CONFIGURATION
B62073E/04
(6.4, 6.5, 6.6)
(6.2, 6.3,
6.4, 6.7)
(7.10)
(7.9)
NOTE
1 Refer to the FANUC I/O UnitModel A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B61813E). or the
FANUC I/O UnitModel B Connecting Manual (B62163E).
2 Refer to the FANUC AC Servo Motor series Descriptions (B65142E).
3 Refer to the FANUC AC Spindle Motor series Descriptions (B65152E).
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.1
ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1
Cabinet Exterior
Environmental
Requirements
The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
this manual cabinet refers to the following:
(1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
(2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;
(3) Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operators panel ; or
(4) Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Conditions
In operation
Ambient
temperature
around cabinet
In storage or
transportation
Change in
temperature
When a PCB
with internal
hard disk is not
mounted
When a PCB
with internal
hard disk is
mounted
0C to 45C
5C to 40C
20C to 60C
1.1C/minute
max.
0.3C/minute
max.
Normal
Relative humidity
75% or less, no
condensation
allowed
Relative humidity
10 to 75%, no
condensation
allowed
Temporary
(within one
month)
Relative humidity
95% or less, no
condensation
allowed
Relative humidity
10 to 90%, no
condensation
allowed
Humidity
Vibration
In operation
0.5 G or less
In storage or
transportation
1.0 G or less
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be
considered if the cabinets are in a
location where the concentration of
dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent
is relatively high.)
Environment
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.1.2
Installation Conditions
of the CNC Inside
Cabinet and Servo Unit
Ambient
temperature
In operation: 0 to 55C
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)
In operation: 5 to 50C
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)
In storage and transportation: 20 to 60C
Humidity
Relative humidity: 95% or less, no condensation allowed

(when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)
Relative humidity: 75% or less, no condensation allowed
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)
Vibration
In operation: 0.5 G or less
Environment
Coolant, lubricants and chips must not splash these units.
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.2
POWER CAPACITY
The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section means
the specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding the
power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo
section.
The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity of
the control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operators panel interface.
When power supply Al is used.
Power capacity
ca acity of the
control section
When power supply BI is used.
Power capacity of the
Depends on servo motor type.
servo section
0.4 KVA
1 KVA
3. INSTALLATION
3.3
CABINET DESIGN
AND INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS OF THE
MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC
B62073E/04
When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
considered. The cabinet is design must meet the following conditions :
(1) The cabinet must be fully closed.
The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne dust,
coolant, and organic solvent.
(2) The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air as the
temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.4 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
(3) A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
Caution: If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
abheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
(4) For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
(5) Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in
oreder to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximatery 11 KV to 20
KV, airborne dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed,
dust passes through the gap and abheres to the unit. This may cause
the insulation of the unit to deteriorate.
Acceptable packing materials:
D Epton sealer No. 686, Nitto Industry Co., Ltd.
D Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, Fuji
Rubber Co., Ltd.
(6) The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dustproof front
panel.
The front panel of the CRT/MDI unit is dustproof. However, we do
not recommend installing the CRT/MDI unit in locations where
coolant directly splashes the front panel. Also, highvoltage is used
in the internal circuits of the CRT/MDI unit. Coolant entering the
CRT/MDI unit might cause serious trouble. The operation pendant
containing the cabinet and CRT/MDI unit is completely sealed, and
designed to prevent dirt, dust and coolant from entering. Pay particular
attention to preventing dust entering the CRT/MDI unit.
(7) Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noisesensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.6 for details of noise
elimination/management.
(8) The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
10
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(9) The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.

Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generatlly must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, it may be necessary to cover the screen with a
magnetic shield.
(10) The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.
Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall extend
from the bottom of this unit.)
Bottom
(11) If the CNC unit is installed at an elevation exceeding 1000 m, the upper
limit temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet at the environmental
conditions described in section 3.1 is subject to restrictions.
With each increase of 100 m above an elevation of 100 m, the upper
limit temperature is reduced by 1C.
Example) When the CNC unit is installed at an elevation of 1750 m,
the allowable upper limit temperature of the CNC inside
the cabinet is calculated as follows:
55C1750/100 1.0C+ 47.5C
Accordingly the allowable temperature range is 0C to
47.5C
When a PCB with builtin hard disk is used, the installation elevation
is restricted as follows:
Standard elevation when in operation:
60 to 3,000 m
Standard elevation when not in operation: 60 to 12,000 m
(12) In unspecified frequencies, the CNC control unit or the hard disk itself
may resonate. If this happens, resonation may cause acceleration
beyond the allowable limits of the devices. Full check this after
installing the CNC control unit in the machine tool.
11
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
NOTE
When a PCB with builtin hard disk is used, erroneous
operation or unexpected accidents may damage the data
stored on the hard disk even if the PCB is used under the
correct environment. To be extra sure, back up important
data from the hard disk.
If the power is turned OFF or a power interruption occurs
during accessing of the hard disk or while the operating
system is still running, data on the hard disk is more likely
to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs. Also, instruct the end
user to pay attention to this.
12
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.4
THERMAL DESIGN
OF THE CABINET
3.4.1
Temperature Rise
within the Cabinet
The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10C
or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.
The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/C

per 1 m2 surface area, that is, when the 6 W heat source is contained in
a cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet rises by 1C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.
To calculate the increase in temperature inside the cabinet, the heat loss
of the units to be installed must be checked. Section 3.4.3 lists the heat
losses of the units provided by FANUC. The heat loss of all other parts
in the cabinet must also be added. Let the obtained total heat loss be P
[W].
The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the difference in
temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10C or
less as the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W]x 6 [W/m2C] surface area S [m2]
10 [C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24 W/C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10C under
these conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240 W. If the actual
internal heat is 320 W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by
13C or more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet
must be improved using the heat exchanger described next.
3.4.2
Cooling by Heat
Exchanger
If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10C by the cooling capacity

of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger
forcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to
the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges
the surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows:
13
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
6 W/m2/C
4 m2) 9.1 W/C+ 33.1 W/C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10C.
See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.
3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit
Name
Control unit
Remarks
Basic unit (4 slots)
60W
Power supply AI
80W
Power supply BI
80W
Power supply BI
80W
Power supply BI
Main CPU board
20W
PMC board
18W
Sub board
18W
Option 1 board
15W
RISC Board
18W
Cannot be used on
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL
Buffer board (Multiple axis)
6W
AXES CPU (Multiple axis)
15W
MMCII CPU board
20W
Can be used only on series 150B
MMCII Graphic board
20W
MMCIII CPU board
20W
MMCIV CPU board
15W
OSI/Ethernet board
18W
Cannot be used on
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL
Data server board
18W
HSSB interface board

CRT/MDI
Heat
loss
3W
9 monochrome CRT/MDI
14W
For both small and standard type
9 color CRT/MDI
38W
9 monochrome PDP/MDI
20W
10.4 color LCD/MDI
20W
For both graphic function builtin type and MMCIV
9.5 color LCD/MDI
20W
14 color CRT/MDI
70W
9.5 LCD (monochrome STN)
10W
14
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Heat
loss
Name
Connection unit Connection unit 1
Remarks
35W
Connection unit 1+2
60W
Operators
panel
Operators panel connection unit
30W
I/O unit
model A
AIF01A, AIF01B
1.2W
AID32A, AID32B
1.2W) 0.23W number of ON points
AID16A, AID16B
AID32E, AID32F
BIF04A1
1.6W
AIF02C
1.2W
BID16A1, BID16B1
1.5W) 0.23 number of ON input points
BID16P1, BID16Q1
BOA12A1
0.9W) (0.09 1.1 IL2) number of ON output points
BOD16A1
1.0W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
BOD16P1
0.3W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
BIA16P1
BMD88A1, BMD88B1
1.3W) 0.23 number of ON input points)

(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
IL: load current

of output
BMD88P1, BMD88Q1
0.4W) 0.23 number of ON input points)

(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points
MMCII
Hard disk unit
I/O unit
model B
26W
Panel mount type 3.5 floppy disk

unit
3W
Portable type 3.5 floppy disk unit
12W
Portable type 5.25 floppy disk unit
26W
Fullkey board unit
2W
Extention adapter unit
7W
Portable cassette streamer unit

Multitap transformer
24W
51W
See FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTIONS

(B65162E) for heat loss of servo amplifier.
15
3. INSTALLATION
3.5
INSTALLING THE
HEAT EXCHANGER
B62073E/04
Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.

Cooling fins A, B and C are not provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor
is required for any of these cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
Table 3.5 List of heat exchangers
Ordering
specification
Cooling
capacity
Size
Cooling fin A
A02B0053K303
9.1 W/C
196 90 1000 mm
Cooling fin B
A02B0053K304
10.1 W/C
444 90 650 mm
Cooling fin C
A02B0053K305
25.2 W/C
560 90 970 mm
Heat exchanger for A02B0060K401

CRT/MDI unit
5.0 W/C
390 86 480 mm
Heat pipe type heat A02B0094C901

exchanger
9.0 W/C
226 132 415 mm
Name
3.5.1
Cooling Fin A/B/C
The cooling fin is shown below (Fig. 3.5.1 (a)). It is installed in a cabinet
made by the machine tool builder.
Viewed from cabinet mounting side
Fig. 3.5.1 (a) External view of cooling fin
16
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Cabinet
Cooling fin
Inside air
flow
Outside air
flow
Fig. 3.5.1 (b) Internal view of cooling fin
The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig. 3.5.1 (b).
The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
1) The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
2) Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
3) The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
a) Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
b) Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
4) For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.
(velocity of air flow measurement)
Set the slit to the intake side and

measure the velocity at the slit.
5) Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.
17
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
External dimensions
Fan mounting
plate
Terminal
block for fan
motor G04
(Attached to
the cooling fins.
Its height is 20
mm)
Mounting metals
for cooling fins
4M4
Mounting screw
Cooling fins
Fan motor
4M4
Mounting screw
for fan mounting plate
Door
Mounting metal
for cooling fins
Mounting metal
Mounting plate for cooling fins
(sheet metal
for fan motor
about 3 mm
thick).
Mounting diagram (example)
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 3.5.1 (c) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin A (A02B0053K303)
NOTE
1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting metal
for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 50 W power.
3 Weight: 6.5 kg
18
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
External dimensions
Mounting stud for cooling fins
(2 studs are attached top and bottom)
Mounting
hole for fan
motor
Fan motor
Cooling fins
66 dia.
Mounting hole
Mounting hole
for fan motor
4M4
Terminal block for fan motor G04

(Attached to the cooling fins.
Its height is 20 mm)
4M4
(Mounting hole
for fan motor)
Door
Mounting
plate for fan
motor

Hole
External shape of
cooling fins.
Hole
66 dia hole or
M5 stud bolt
Stud hole
(Make a hole 5 dia
for fan motor)
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 3.5.1 (d) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B0053K304)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the
cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.
2 Use four fan motors with about 20 W power.
3 Weight: 7.5 kg
19
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Mounting stud for cooling fins
External dimensions
(Attached to the cooling fins)

Mounting plate
for fan motor
Terminal block
for fan motor
G04
Cooling fins
(Attached to
the cooling
fins.Its height
is 20 mm)
Fan motor
6M4
Mounting hole
for fan motor
86 dia.
Mounting hole
5M4
(Mounting hole
for fan motor)
Mounting
plate for fan
motor
Door

External shape
of cooling fins.
66 dia hole or
M5 stud bolt
(This hole combines mounting

hole and stud
hole.)
Panel cut diagram
Fig. 3.5.1 (e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B0053K305)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not
attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the machine
tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 40 W power.
3 Weight: 13.5 kg
20
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit
hole
Lot
No.
Weight: 0.65 kg
External Dimensions of External
Cooling Fan
External Dimensions of
Finger Guard
Air inlet
Packing
Power terminal
M4 screw
AC200 V 50 Hz
AC200 V/220 V
60 Hz
48 W
Air outlet
Connector for external

cooling fan
Cooling fin: About 6 kg

(Excluding attached parts)
Fig. 3.5.2 (a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI (A02B0060K401)
NOTE
External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside
cooling fin.
21
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Heat exchanger
Outside
Inside
Air outlet
Air outlet
Main body
of heat
exchanger
(1)
Air inlet
Prepare mounting
screws and mounting panel.
External cooling fan (attached)

Finger guard (attached)
(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.

(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install
the panel where it can be exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet
on heat exchanger mounting panel.
Fig. 3.5.2 (b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI
22
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Horizontal type CRT/MDI only
Inside
Horizontal type CRT/MDI

and machine operators panel
Vertical type CRT/MDI only
Outside
Side view
CRT/MDI
370
Heat exchanger
Min
35
370
Min
35
Top view
Refer to these figures for allocation of CRT/MDI and heat exchanger.
Fig. 3.5.2 (c) Allocation of 14 color CRT/MDI and heat exchanger
23
370
Min
35
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type
Heat Exchanger
3.5.3.1
Installation
The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heatefficient unit. Because the fan is builtin, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the panel cut operation.
(1) Specifications
Installation format
Fan
specifications
Cooling ability
(W/C)
Installation type in board

9 (50 Hz when operating)
Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Rating current (A)
Rating input (W)
Weight (kg)
Color
Order specifications Heat exchanger
200 VAC
50
60
0.28
0.24
28
26
4
Munsell signal N1.5
A02B0094C901
Remarks
D
D
D
A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.

The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L00010219#A
Filter specifications
A2500689X004
If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.
24
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(2) External dimensions
Power source
terminal M4
AIR FLOW
External fan unit

Earth terminal
M4
Internal fan unit
AIR FLOW
(Installation board thickness)
Fig. 3.5.3.1 (a) External dimensions diagram of heat pipe type heat transformer
25
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(3) Panel cut dimensions
187.5
190
2.5
180
HOLE
190
175
3f 5
6f 6 or stud welder (M4)
214
Fig. 3.5.3.1 (b) External dimensions diagram of panel cut
(4) Installation method

Please install the heater exchanger by the following sequence:
Heat exchanger
main unit
Fan power cable
(detach the connector)
External fan unit
Installation screw B (1)
Installation screws A (2)

Earth cable
(if the installation screw on the fan side is
detached, it can be taken out.)
Installation screw
Installation panel
(Fig. 1)
Installation screw B (1)

(Fixed to the panel)
(Fig. 2)
26
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(a) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
(Fig. 1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take
out the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the
earth cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the
installation screw B (1 piece).
(b) Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section
which has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the
screws, first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger
main unit with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1).
After that, secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this
case, the external fan unit installation screw holes should be
aligned with the main unit screw holes. (Please provide the
installation screws for the heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw): 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw):
5 kgf.cm
(c) Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit
(the unit detached in section 1), and secure the installation screw
A to the main unit from the outside.
The installation is now complete.
3.5.3.2
Maintenance
It is necessary to regularly clean the heat pipe type heat exchanger,

because the cooling ability is reduced by the accumulation of dust. The
frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation
environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment
regarding the amount of dirt.
(1) Air filter cleaning and replacement method
(a) When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fans
electric power source.
(b) Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.
Detach the cover by pressing the flanges

which are in the grooves of both sides towards the inside using a flat blade screwdriver, etc.
27
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(c) Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both
sides.
(d) When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinse
with clean water, and allow to dry naturally. When replacing,
replace with the same product.
(e) To install, insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in the
groove, and press. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even
if it is pulled.
(2) Cleaning heat exchanger
(a) When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source.
(b) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
Heat exchanger
main unit
Power cable for fan
(detach the connector)
Detach the two installation

screws (A) of the external fan
unit, and detach the unit from
the main unit by sliding it
down. Detach the power
source cable to the fan and
the earth cable. Also detach
installation screws (B).
External fan unit
Installation screws A (2)

Earth cable (if the installation screw on the
Installation screws B (1) fan side is detached, it can be taken out)
(i) Cleaning fan unit

Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan
motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth. When the
condensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to
remove, soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightly squeeze it and
wipe away the dirt.
However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical
sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.
28
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(ii)Cleaning heat exchanger fan

Detach the heat exchanger from the unit and either blow off with
air, wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt,
condensation, etc.
When the dirt is especially severe
(1) Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable
from the main unit.
Main unit
Terminal unit and cable
(2) Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan
section by brushing.
At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the element.
(3) After cleaning, dry well.
(iii)Installation
After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer.
(1) Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.
(2) Install the fan unit in the original position. At this time, do not
forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable.
29
3. INSTALLATION
3.6
ACTION AGAINST
NOISE
3.6.1
Separating Signal
Lines
B62073E/04
The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surfacemount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in Subsections 3.6.1 to 3.6.5.
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
following table:
Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group
A
Signal line
Action
Bind the cables in group A

separately (Note 1) from groups
Secondary AC power line
B and C or cover group A with
an electromagnetic shield (Note
AC/DC power lines (containing 2).
the power lines for the servo
and spindle motors)
See Section 3.6.4 and connect
spark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid
solenoid and relay.
Primary AC power line
AC/DC relay
B
DC solenoid (24 VDC)
Connect diodes with

solenoid and relay.
relay
DC
DC relay (24 VDC)

Bind the cables in group B
separately from group A or
cover group B with an
electromagnetic shield.
shield
DI/DO cable between the CNC Separate group B as far from
and power magnetics cabinet Group C as possible.
DI/DO cable between the CNC It is more desirable to cover
group B with the shield.
and machine
30
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Group
C
Signal line
Action
Cable between the CNC and Bind the cables in group C

separately from group A or
servo amplifier
cover group C with an
Cable for position and velocity electromagnetic shield.
feedback
Cable between the CNC and
spindle amplifier
Cable for the position coder
Separate group C as far from

Group B as possible.
Cable for the manual pulse Be sure to perform shield

generator
processing
g in Section 3.6.5.
Cable between the CRT and
MDI
RS232C and RS422 interface
cables
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
3.6.2
The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground
(1) Signal ground system (SG)

The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0 V) of the
electrical signal system to the machine.
(2) Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames
and cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables
between the units are connected.
(3) System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
31
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Signal ground system

Frame ground system
Power
magnetics
unit
Servo
amplifier
System ground system
CNC
control unit
Operators panel
Machine tool
Power
magnetics
cabinet
Distribution board
WARNING
Notes on connecting the ground systems
D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at
only one place in the CNC control unit.
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100
ohms or less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough
crosssectional area to safely carry the accidental current
flow into the system ground when an accident such as a
short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the crosssectional area of the AC
power cable or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system
ground wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire
connected.
32
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.6.3
(a) Control unit
Grounding Each Unit

Control unit
PCB
Signal
ground (SG)
SG
M4
(Only thread
hole)
M3
M3
(With thread)
Ground cable
Wire with a sectional
area 2 mm2 or more
Ground cable
Ground plate of
the cabinet
System ground
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
33
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(b) CRT unit

M5 stud
(Rear side)
f
14CRT
M4 stud
(Rear side)
9 PDP
9 CRT
9.5 LCD
10.4 LCD
(c) Connection unit 1/2
M4 screw
(d) Operators panel connection unit
34
Ground install board
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(e) Tape raeder unit

(Rear side)
(Rear side)
f
f
M5 stud
Tape reader with reel
Tape reader without reel
(f) I/O Unit model A
Ground the terminals for (ABU05A, ABU05B, ABU10A, ABU10B)

ABU05A, ABU10A
ABU05B, ABU10B
M4 terminal
for ground
M3 terminal
for ground (SG)
M4 mount hole
for ground
NOTE
Ground SG terminal to the mount hole.
35
M5 stud
3. INSTALLATION
3.6.4
Noise Suppressor
B62073E/04
The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode
for a DC device.
Notes on selecting the spark killer
Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This

type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R): Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil
2
2
2) Capacitance (C): 1 to 1 (mF)
10
20
Equivalent circuit of thespark killer
Spark killer
AC relay
Motor
Spark killer
36
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Cable Clamp and

Shield Processing
The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the method
shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp are
attached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by the
machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings for clamp
40 mm to 80 mm
3.6.5
Fig. 3.6.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)
37
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Machine side
installation
board
Control Rack
Ground plate
Metal fittings
for clamp
Shield cover
Fig. 3.6.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Mount screw hole
Fig. 3.6.5 (c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
38
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Ground plate
8mm
12mm
20mm
Fig. 3.6.5 (d) Ground plate holes Ground plate
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig. 3.6.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B0118K001 (5 pieces)
NOTE
Select cables of appropriate length.
We do not recommend using cables longer than necessary.
Such cables may demonstrate poor resistance to electrical
noise or be influenced by electrical noise. Also, if excess
cable is wrapped up in a coil, this may increase impedance.
This may induce an extremely high voltage during ON/OFF
switching of signals, or lead to erroneous operation caused
by malfunction or electrical noise.
39
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.7
CONTROL UNIT
3.7.1
Printed circuit boards used for control of Series 15B is mounted in a rack
equipped with several slots.
Configuration and
Installation of the
Control Unit
Option board
Optionboard
Option board
Option 1
board
Option board
RISC
MMCII
MMCII
Graphic
MMCIII
MMCIV
OSI ethernet
Graphic display control
Sub board
Communication control
(Remote
buffer)
(DNC 1)
Main CPU
board
PMC board
SUB CPU
CNC CPU
PMC CPU
I/O LINK
Memory Card
4axis control
spindle ( 2)
Analog I/O
HDI 4
RS232C
RS422
4axis control
spindle ( 2)
CRT/MDI
RS232C 2
HDI 4
MPG 3
Power supply
unit
ON/OFF
control
Power
supply unit
Conversion
control
AI or BI
FBUS
OPTION
BASIC
MAIN PMC PSU

CPU
MAIN PMC PSU

CPU
MAIN PMC PSU

CPU
MAIN PMC PSU

CPU
Fig. 3.7.1 (a) Control unit configuration of Series 15B
NOTE
The SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
40
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
Option board
Option board
Option board
Option board
RISC
MMCII
MMCII
Graphic
MMCIII
MMCIV
OSI ethernet
Option 1
board
Graphic display
control
Communication control
(Remote buffer)
(DNC 1)
Sub CPU
board
Main CPU
board
PMC board
SUB CPU
CNC CPU
PMC CPU
I/O LINK
Memory Card
Analog input
HDI 4
RS232C
RS422
CRT/MDI
RS232Cx2
HDIx4
MPGx3
Power supply
unit
ON/OFF
control
Power
supply unit
Conversion
control
AI or BI
FBUS
OPTION
BASIC
SUB MAIN PMC PSU

CPU CPU
SUB MAIN PMC PSU

CPU CPU
SUB MAIN PMC PSU

CPU CPU
Fig. 3.7.1 (b) Control unit configuration of Series 15B (Multiple axis)
NOTE
The SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the
41
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04

AXES CPU
board
AXES CPU
Buffer board
Buffer
4axis control
spindle ( 2)
Near zero
MPG 3
AXES CPU
board
Power
supplyy unit
AXES CPU
ON/OFF
control
4axis control
spindle ( 2)
Near zero
Power
supply unit
AI or BI
OPTION
BUF AXES PSU

FER CPU
BASIC
BUF AXES PSU

FER CPU
BUF AXES PSU

FER CPU
Fig. 3.7.1 (c) Configuration of Series 15B additional locker used with multiaxis machines
NOTE
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending on
the system configuration.
The rack consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a backplane PCB. Since
the rack is provided with builtin fan motors, it does not require the
external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes into
the rack from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor, which is
located on the top of the rack. Space as shown in Fig. 3.7.1 (d) must be
reserved not to disturb the air flow ((A), (B))
The backplane PCB, which is located on the rear side of the rack,
interconnects the PCBs installed in the rack. It has another connector
which appears at the left side panel of the rack. The connector may be used
in the future. The space (C) for this shall be reserved as shown in Fig.
3.7.1 (d).
42
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
AIR FLOW
AIR FLOW
50
250
50
30
172
Fig. 3.7.1 (d)
43
unit [mm]
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.7.2
Battery for Memory
Backup
WARNING
The part program, offset data and system parameters are stored in the
CMOS memory of the control unit and they are retained even while the
main power is cut off. The power of the memory is backed up by a lithium
battery which is mounted on the front panel of the power supply unit. Data
is retained even while the main power is OFF. The control unit is shipped
from the factory equipped with the battery.
Replace the battery within one week after the BAT warning message is
displayed blinking on the CRT screen indicating lower battery power, or
when the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. Otherwise, data in
memory will be lost.
A lithium battery is used for the battery. Follow the following
precautions.
WARNING
Incorrect replacement of the battery may cause an
explosion.
Replace only with the specified battery.
Power Supply
Unit front panel
Battery
Compartment
Battery inside
Fig. 3.7.2
NOTE
The part program, parameters and variables are stored to
nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Normally, turning the
power ON and OFF will not cause data in memory to be lost.
However, it is conceivable that erroneous operation may
delete data, or important data stored in nonvolatile may
have to be deleted to restore trouble.
We recommend backing up data beforehand so that the
system can be restored quickly in the event that unexpected
trouble occurs.
44
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.7.3
Replacing the Battery
WARNING
Before you replace the battery, turn the machine tool (CNC) ON and make
an emergency stop.
Replacing the battery involves opening the cabinet with the power still
ON. So, only personnel trained in maintenance and safety procedures may
replace batteries.
When you open the cabinet to replace the battery, do not touch
mark and covered with
highvoltage circuits indicated by the
antielectric shock covers.
If the cover becomes loose and you touch a highvoltage circuit, you will
be electrocuted.
(1) Use a lithium battery.

When using battery unit A02B0162H101 or H102
Ordering drawing number: A02B0120K106
When using battery unit A02B0162H107 or H108
Ordering drawing number: A02B0200K102
(2) Turn on the 15B.
(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power supply unit.
The case can be removed easily by holding the top and bottom of it and
pulling.
Front panel of the

power supply unit
Battery case
Battery
Fig. 3.7.3 (a) Replacing the battery (1)
45
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(4) Remove the connector from the battery.
BATTERY
Cable connector
PC board
connector
Battery
Front panel of hte

power supply unit
Fig. 3.7.3 (b) Replacing the battery (2)
(5) Replace the battery and reconnect the connector.

(6) Install the battery case.
(7) Turn off the Series 15B.
46
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.8
CABLE LEADIN
DIAGRAM
3.8.1
Configuration of
Control Unit
Connectors
unit [mm]
Power supply
unit
Fig. 3.8.1 (a)
(1) Above diagram shows the grid of connector location.

Control board may not have all connectors as shown above.
For actual connector layout of each board, please see the connector
layout diagrams in Fig. 3.8.1 (c) (s).
47
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
(2) For the power supply unit, please see Fig. 3.8.1 (b1) and (b2).
Minislot
unit [mm]
Fig. 3.8.1 (b1) Power unit connector layout

For power unit A02B0162H101 and H102
48
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
unit [mm]
Fig. 3.8.1 (b2) Power unit connector layout

For power unit A02B0162H107 and H108
49
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
UPPER LINE LOWER LINE

MARKING
MARKING
FUNCTION
POS.
LED INDICATORS
MEMORY CARD I/F
SERIAL I/O LINK
IOLINK
Fig. 3.8.1 (c) PMC board
50
JD1A
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04

MARKING
MARKING
FUNCTION
POS.
LED INDICATORS
CRT DISPLAY
MDI
SERIAL PORT 1
SERIAL PORT 2
MPG
HIGH SPEED DI1
SERIAL SPINDLE 1
(POSITION CODER1)
ANALOG OUT
APC BATTERY
SERVO AMP 1
SERVO AMP 2
SERVO AMP 3
SERVO AMP 4
PULSE CODER 1
PULSE CODER 2
PULSE CODER 3
PULSE CODER 4
LINEAR SCALE 1
LINEAR SCALE 2
LINEAR SCALE 3
LINEAR SCALE 4
SPDL-1
JA7A
APCBAT
JA4A
Fig. 3.8.1 (d) Main CPU board
51
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04

MARKING
MARKING
FUNCTION
LED INDICATORS
POS.
SERIAL PORT 9
SERIAL PORT 4
HIGH SPEED DI2
ANALOG INPUT
POSITION CODER2
ANALOG OUT2
APC BATTERY
SERVO AMP 5
SERVO AMP 6
SERVO AMP 7
SERVO AMP 8
PULSE CODER 5
PULSE CODER 6
PULSE CODER 7
PULSE CODER 8
LINEAR SCALE 5
LINEAR SCALE 6
LINEAR SCALE 7
LINEAR SCALE 8
Fig. 3.8.1 (e) SUB board
52
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION

MARKING
MARKING
LED INDICATORS
CRT DISPLAY
RS232C PORT3
RS422 PORT1
POS.
With only
graphic
function
With graphic
function and
communication
function
With only
communication
function
Fig. 3.8.1 (f) Option 1 board
NOTE
The communication function refers to the remote buffer
function or DNC1 function.
53
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04

MARKING
MARKING
FUNCTION
LEDs
POS.
Hard disk interface
Floppy disk interface
Graphic bus
Keyboard interface
RS422 interface
Centronics interface
RS232C interface, channel 1
RS232C interface, channel 2
Fig. 3.8.1 (g) MMCII CPU board
NOTE
The MMCII CPU (A02B0120J202), which requires
three RS232C channels, uses JD6 as an RS232C port.
54
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04

MARKING
MARKING
FUNCTION
LEDs
POS.
Graphic bus
CRT interface
Not used
Fig. 3.8.1 (h) MMCII graphic board
55
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION

MARKING
MARKING
LEDs
POS.
VIDEO output (CNC side)

Video input
Serial port 6
Serial port 7
Serial port 8
Fig. 3.8.1 (i) MMCIII CPU board
56
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION

MARKING
MARKING
LEDs
POS.
CRT I/F
MDI I/F
Serial bort 1
Serial bort 2
Manual pulse generator I/F
High DI I/F
Battery backup for

board replacement
Multiple axisBus
Fig. 3.8.1 (j) Multiple main CPU board
57
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION

MARKING
MARKING
LEDs
POS.
Serial port 9
Serial port 4
High speed DI I/F

Analog input
Fig. 3.8.1 (k) Multiple SUB CPU board
58
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION

MARKING
MARKING
LEDs
POS.
Operation check input 1
Near zero input
Serial spindle 2
Analog spindle 2
APC Battery
Servo amplifier 1
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 4
Pulse coder 1
Pulse coder 2
Pulse coder 3
Pulse coder 4
Linear scale 1
Linear scale 2
Linear scale 3
Linear scale 4
Fig. 3.8.1 (l) AXIS CPU board
59
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION

MARKING
MARKING
LEDs
POS.
Multiple axisBus
Fig. 3.8.1 (m) Multiple buffer board
60
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
POS. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
UPPER LINE
MARKING
FUNCTION
LOWER LINE
MARKING
LEDs
STATUS/ALARM
LEDs
LV ALM
Fuse
F21 5A
Fig. 3.8.1 (n) RISC board
NOTE
The
RISC board cannot be
61
used
on
the
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
UPPER LINE
MARKING
FUNCTION
LOWER LINE
MARKING
LEDs
STATUS/ALARM
NC Video signal input
NC CRT
JA1B
Video signal output
CRT
JA1A
Serial port 1
R2321
JD5F
Serial port 2
R2322
JD5G
LCD adjustment
LCD ADJUST
Floppy disk drive
FDD
JD8
11
Parallel keyboard
CENTRO
JD9
12
Full keyboard
KEYBOARD
CD32A
LEDs
LEDs
LEDs
Battery
AL4 (FUSE)
AL5 (POWER)
AL6 (BATTERY)
BATTERY
BAT2
Mouse
MOUSE
POS. 1
7
8
9
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
CD32B
Fig. 3.8.1 (o) MMCIV board
NOTE
The MMCIV board cannot be
62
used
on
the
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
POS. 1
2
UPPER LINE
MARKING
FUNCTION
LOWER LINE
MARKING
LEDs
STATUS/ALARM
Fuse
F1
2.0A
10BASE2 I/F
10BASE2
CNX
Switch
LOAD
Switch
RESTART
Serial port
RS232C
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CD29
19
20
21
Fig. 3.8.1 (p) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE2)
NOTE
The OSI/Ethernet board cannot be
63
used
on
the
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
POS. 1
2
UPPER LINE
MARKING
FUNCTION
LOWER LINE
MARKING
LEDs
STATUS/ALARM
Fuse
F1
2.0A
AUI I/F
AUI
CD27
Switch
LOAD
Switch
RESTART
Serial port
RS232C
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CD29
19
20
21
Fig. 3.8.1 (q) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE5)
NOTE
The OSI/Ethernet board cannot be
64
used
on
the
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
POS.1
2
UPPER LINE
MARKING
FUNCTION
LOWER LINE
MARKING
LEDs
STATUS/ALARM
Fuse
F1
2.0A
Ethernet interface
AUI
CD27
Bultin HDD access lamp
HDD
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Fig. 3.8.1 (r) Data server board
65
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
FUNCTION
UPPER LINE
MARKING
LEDs
LOWER LINE LEFT LINE

MARKING
MARKING
RIGHT LINE
MARKING
STATUS
Rotary switch
SW
LEDs
AL
Highspeed serial bus interface
HSSB
Mini slot interface
JNAM
COP7
Fig. 3.8.1 (s) HSSB interface board
66
21
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.8.2
Cable Leadin for
Standalone Cabinet A
67
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.8.3
Cable Leadin for
Standalone Cabinet B
68
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.8.4
Cable Leadin for
Additional Cabinet A
69
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.9
MAINTENANCE
AREA
3.9.1
Maintenance Area for
Selfstanding A Type
Cabinet
About
About 130
70
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.9.2
Selfstanding B Type
Cabinet
About
About 130
71
3. INSTALLATION
B62073E/04
3.9.3
Additional Cabinet A
About
About
72
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
TOTAL CONNECTION
73
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.1
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES
15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, SERIES
150TB/MB/TTB
(IN CASE OF SERIAL
SPINDLE)
4.1.1
Connection Diagram
for Series
15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, Series
150TB/MB/TTB
(When LCD/MDI Unit
with Builtin Graphic
Functions is not Used)
74
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
Power supply
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)
PMC BOARD
MEM CARD
(ICMC)
IOLINK(JD1A)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
AC200V240V POWER
ON/OFF
MEMORY
CARD
JD1A
JD1B
CP32
FANUC I/O Link
POWER
MAGNETICS
I/O Unit
MODELA
24VDC
MPG
HIGHSPEED DI 4
APC BATTERY
6V
SERIAL
CN11A
INTERFACE
CN11B
SPINDLE
1ST SERVO
AMP
CN1
SCALE1(JF21)
T1
SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC
EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
AC200V
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE CODER
2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
4TH SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
75
POSITION
CODER
SERIES CN2
CN13
To 2ND AMP
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)
OPERATORS
PANEL
: :
RS232C I/O DEVICE
SPDL1(JA7A)
ENC1(JF1)
CP61 OP PANEL
JD1A INTERFACE
JD1B UNIT
HDI1(JA5A)
AMP1(JV1)
CN2
CRT/MDI
UNIT
CN1
CNK1
+24V WHEN 9 MONOCHROME CRT
MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
APCBAT(JA4A)
SCALE
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
SUB BOARD
R2329(JD5J)
R4224(JD6D)
AIN(JA6)
ANALOG I/O
HDI2(JA5B)
RS232C
I/O DEVICE
RS422
I/O DEVICE
HIGH SPEED DI
SPDL2(JA7B)
ASPDL2(JA8B)
APC BATTERY
APCBAT(JA4B)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
AMP1(JV5)
ENC1(JF5)
6V
5TH SERVO
T1
AMP
CN1
EMERGENCY STOP
5TH SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE1(JF25)
AMP2(JV6)
ENC2(JF6)
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7)
ENC3(JF7)
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8)
ENC4(JF8)
SCALE4(JF28)
AC100V
AC200V
SCALE
6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
OPTION 1
To CRT (In case of graphic display)
CRT(JA1)
RS2323(JD5C)
REMOTE BUFFER (RS232C)
RS4221(JD6A)
REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)
PCR 20 connector (20 pins)

AMP connector
Others
NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.
76
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.1.2
Connection Diagram
for Series
15TB/TTB/MB
(When LCD/MDI Unit
with Builtin Graphic
Functions is Used)
77
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
POWER SUPPLY
AC200V240V POWER
ACIN (CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)
JA2
ON/OFF
CP5
LCD with
JN1
graphic
function
PMC BOARD
MEM CARD
(CNMC)
IOLINK
(JD1A)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
HDI1(JA5A)
MEMORY
CARD
FANUC I/O Link
(JA4A)
AMP1(JV1)
ENC1(JF1)
SCALE1
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)
CP61 OP PANEL
JD1A INTERFACE
JD1B UNIT
JD1A
JD1B
CP32
OPERATORS
PANEL
::
POWER
MAGNETICS
I/O Unit
MODELA
RS232C I/O DEVICE

MPG
HIGH SPEED DI
SERIES CN2
SERIAL
JA7B INTERFACE
JA7A SPINDLE
APC BATTERY
1ST SERVO AMP

T1
6V
3
POSITION
CODER
SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC
2ND AMP
CN1
EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
AC200V
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE CODER
SCALE
(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
CNK1
24VDC
SPDL1(JA7A)
APCBAT
CNK2
MDI
78
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
SUB BOARD
R2329(JD5J)
RS232C I/O DEVICE
R4224(JD6D)
AIN(JA6)
HDI2 (JA5B)
RS422 I/O DEVICE

ANALOG I/O
HIGH SPEED DI
SPDL2 (JA7B)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
ASPDL2
(JA8B)
APCBAT
(JA4B)
AMP1(JV5 )
ENC1(JF5 )
SCALE1
EMERGENCY STOP
APC BATTERY
5TH
SERVO AMP
6V
AC100V
AC200V
T1
5TH SERVO
MOTOR
CN1
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE
(JF25)
AMP2(JV6 )
ENC2(JF6 )
6TH AXIS
SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7 )
ENC3(JF7 )
7TH AXIS
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8 )
ENC4(JF8 )
8TH AXIS
SCALE4(JF28)

AMP connector
Others
NOTE
79
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.2
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES
15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, SERIES
150TB/MB/TTB
(IN CASE OF
ANALOG SPINDLE)
80
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
POWER SUPPLY
AC200V240V
POWER
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)
IOLINK
(JD1A)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
HDI1(JA5A)
SPDL1(JA7A)
ASPDL1(JA8A)
APCBAT(JA4A)
AMP1(JV1)
ENC1(JF1)
SCALE1(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)
CP61
JD1A
JD1B
MEM CARD
(CNMC)
MEMORY
CARD
JD1A
JD1B
CP32
FANUC I/O Link
+24V WHEN 9
MONOCHROME CRT
PMC BOARD
ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
UNIT
CNK1
OP PANEL
INTERFACE
UNIT
::
I/O Unit
MODELA
OPERATORS
PANEL
POWER
MAGNETICS
24VDC
RS232C I/O DEVICE
MPG
HIGH SPEED DI 4
CN2
ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE
APC BATTERY
1ST
SERVO AMP
6V
CN1
POSITION
CODER
SPINDLE
MOTOR
T1
200VAC
EMERGENCY STOP
100VAC
200VAC
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE
81
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
SUB BOARD
R2329(JD5J)
R4224(JD6D)
AIN(JA6)
HDI2(JA5B)
SPDL2(JA7B)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
ASPDL2(JA8B)
APCBAT(JA4B)
AMP1(JV5)
ENC1(JF5)
U
N
I
T
SCALE1(JF25)
AMP2(JV6)
ENC2(JF6)
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7)
ENC3(JF7)
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8)
ENC4(JF8)
SCALE4(JF28)
OPTION1
CRT(JA1)
RS2323(JD5C)
RS4221(JD6A)
B62073E/04
RS232C I/O DEVICE

RS422 I/O DEVICE
ANALOG I/O 4
HIGH SPEED DI 4
POSITION
CODER
ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE
SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC
EMERGENCY STOP
APC BATTERY
5TH
SERVO AMP
6V
AC100V
AC200V
T1
5TH SERVO
MOTOR
CN1
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE
To CRT (in case of graphic display)

AMP connector
Others
NOTE
82
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.3
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15MB OR
SERIES 150MB
(IN CASE OF
MULTIPLE AXIS)
83
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.3.1
Control Unit
POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)
PMC BOARD
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
MEM CARD(CNMC)
+24V WHEN 9 MONOCHROME CRT
MEMORY
CARD
FANUC I/O Link
I/O LINK(JD1A)
CP61
JD1A
JD1B
CN2
CN1
CNK1
OP PANEL
INTERFACE
UNIT
JD1A
JD1B
CP32
::
INPUT
UNIT
CPD2A
CRT/MDI
UNIT
ON/OFF
OPERATORS
PANEL
POWER
MAGNETICS
I/O Unit
MODELA
24VDC
MAIN CPU BOARD

CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
HDI1(JA5A)
MAX BUS(JNC)
RS232C I/O DEVICE
HIGH SPEED DI
SUB CPU BOARD

R2329(JD5J)
RS232C I/O DEVICE

RS422 I/O DEVICE
R4224(JD6D)
ANALOG INPUT
HIGH SPEED DI
AIN(JA6)
HDI2(JA5B)
OPTION1 BOARD
200 to
240VAC
POWER
CPD1
CPD2B
4
4
To CRT (in case of graphic display)
CRT(JA1)
RS2323(JD5C)
RS4221(JD6A)
TO ADDITIONAL CABINET (BUFFER BOARD JNC)

AMP connector
Others
NOTE
84
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.3.2
Additional Cabinet
(In Case of Serial
Spindle Interface)
POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
CPD1
INPUT
CPD2C UNIT
BUFFER BOARD
MAX BUS(JNC)
1ST CPU BOARD
To control unit (Main CPU board JNC)
SPDL1(JA7A)
ASPDL1(JA8A)
A
D
D
I
T
I
O
N
A
L
C
A
B
I
N
E
T
APCBAT(JA4)
AMP1(JV1)
JA7B
JA7A
APC BATTERY
SERIES CN2
SERIAL
INTERFACE
SPINDLE
SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC
TO 2ND AMP
1ST SERVO AMP

6V
EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
AC200V
T1
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
CN1
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
ENC1(JF1)
SCALE
SCALE1(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)
POSITION
CODER
2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ADDS1(JF61)
1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ADDS2(JF62)
2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ADDS3(JF63)
3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ADDS4(JF64)
4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
2ND CPU BOARD
Reference position approach signal

NZ/ZD(JA16)
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending

on the system configuration.
85

AMP connector
Others
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
NOTE
4.3.3
Additional Cabinet
(In Case of Analog
Spindle Interface)
86
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
CPD1 INPUT T
CPD2C UNIT
BUFFER BOARD
MAX BUS(JNC)
1ST CPU BOARD
To control unit (Main CPU board JNC)

POSITION
CODER
ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE
SPDL1(JA7A)
SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC
ASPDL1(JA8A)
A
D
D
I
T
I
O
N
A
L
C
A
B
I
N
E
T
APCBAT(JA4)
AMP1(JV1)
APC BATTERY
EMERGENCY STOP
1ST SERBO
AMP
T1
6V
AC100V
AC200V
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
CN1
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
ENC1(JF1)
SCALE
SCALE1(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)
2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE
ADDS1(JF61)
1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ADDS2(JF62)
2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ADDS3(JF63)
3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
ADDS4(JF64)
4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR
Reference position approach signal
NZ/ZD(JA16)
2ND CPU BOARD
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending

on the system configuration.

AMP connector
Others
NOTE
87
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
4.3.4
Connection Between
the Control Unit and
Additional Locker
B62073E/04
Instead of the two flat cables employed by the F15A (used with multiaxis
machines), a 96core cable is used to connect the control unit to the
additional locker. The cable length, however, is the same as that of the
F15A (1.5 m).
1.5m 96core cable (supplied by FANUC)

Specification: A02B0162K821
88
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.4
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15B (IN
CASE OF MMCII)
POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
200240VAC POWER
SUPPLY
Main CPU BOARD

MDI(JA2)
MMCII
GRAPHIC BOARD
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T
ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
UNIT
CNK1
PW2
JD7A
HARD
DISK
UNIT
JD7B
CRT(JA1)
SCSI terminator
MMCII
MAIN CPU BOARD
CASSETTE
STREAMER UNIT
JD7B
JD7A
PW1
HDD(JD7)
FLOPPY DISK
JD8
PW1
FDD(JD8)
CENTRO(JD9)
RS422(JD6)
PRINTER
CENTRONICS
(Note 2)
RS422 I/O DEVICE

RS232C I/O DEVICE
RS232C I/O DEVICE
RS232C I/O DEVICE
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
EXTENSION
ADAPTER UNIT
CD14
JD5
CA38
JA1
KEY(JD5C)
89
KEYBOARD UNIT
AMP connector
Others
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMCII and peripheral devices. For
details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.
2 The MMCII CPU (A02B0120J202), which requires three RS232C channels, uses JD6 as
an RS232C port.
3 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
90
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.5
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15B (IN
CASE OF MMCIII)
POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
MINI SLOT
EXTERNAL HARD
DISK INTERFACE
SCSI(JD19)
C
O
N
T
R
MAIN CPU BOARD
O
MDI(JA2)
L
AC200V240V POWER
SUPPLY
ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
UNIT
CNK1
(Note 2)
U OPTION 1 BOARD
N
I
CRT(JA1)
T
MMCIII
CPU
External hard disk

(POKEDY2.5)
(Note 2)
NC CRT(JA1B)
CART(JA1A)
R2321(JD5F)
RS232C CHANNEL1
R2322(JD5G)
RS232C CHANNEL2
R2323(JD5H)
RS232C CHANNEL3

AMP connector
Others (connection to external
hard disk3M MDR connector)
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMCIII and peripheral devices. For
2 Used for application download only.
3 The MMCIII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
91
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
4.6
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
MMCIV
POWER SUPPLY
ACIN (CP1)
AC200V240V
POWER SUPPLY
ACOUT (CP2)
ACOUT (CP3)
ON/OFF (CP4)
ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
+24V (CP5)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
CN1
UNIT
CNK1
MAIN CPU BOARD

MDI (JA2)
Option 1 BOARD
CRT (JA1)
U
N
I
T
MMCIV CPU
NC CRT (JA1B)
CRT (JA1A)
R2321 (JD5F)
RS232C I/O DEVICE
R2322 (JD5G)
FLOPPY DISK UNIT

*
JD8
FDD (JD8)
PW1
AC100V IN
CENTRO (JD9)
PRINTER
CUSTOM
KEYBOARD
EX KEY (JD21)
*
KEYBOARD (CD32A)
FULL KEYBOARD
MOUSE (CD32B)
92
*
MOUSE
: PCR20 connector (20 pins)
: AMP connector
: Others
POWER
SUPPLY
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMCIV and peripheral devices. For
2 Devices marked by an asterisk * are used only for application download only. These devices
cannot be used for incorporating units.
3 The MMCIV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
93
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION
94

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.1
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT PANEL LAYOUT
CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)
F2 (AC INPUT FUSE)
F1 (AC INPUT FUSE)
CP3 (AC OUTPUT)
CP2 (AC OUTPUT)
Key location
PIL (PILOT LAMP)

CP8 (BATTERY)
ALM (ALARM LAMP)

CP4 (POWER
CONTROL)
6pin connector
CP6 (+24E OUTPUT)
CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)
F3 (+24V FUSE 3.2A)
F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)
Fig. 5.1 (a) For power unit A02B0162H101 or H102
CAUTION
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2
CP3
CP4
CP5
CP6
COMPATIBLE
INCOMPATIBLE (key groove on the connector
prevents erroneous connection)
95

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)
F1 (AC INPUT
FUSE)
CP2 (AC OUTPUT)
CP3 (AC OUTPUT)
200B
200B
200A
200A
Key
location
PIL (PILOT LAMP)
CP8 (BATTERY)
1
+VB
0V
ALM (ALARM LAMP)

CP4 (POWER CONTROL)
6pin connector
CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)

3
2
0V
+24V
B3
FB
A3
COM
B2
FA
A2
OFF
B1
AL
A1
ON
CP6 (+24E FUSE 5A)

3
F3 (+24V FUSE)
AI 3.2A
BI 5.0A
0V
+24E
F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)
Fig. 5.1 (b) For power unit A02B0162H107 or H108
CAUTION
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2
COMPATIBLE
CP3
CP4
CP5
CP6
96
INCOMPATIBLE
(key groove on the
connector prevents
erroneous connection)

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.2
CONNECTING THE
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
5.2.1
When an Input Unit is
not Used
The power supply unit of the Series 15B has the power on/off control
function. The power supply unit of the Series 15B therefore does not
need an input unit, which is necessary for the power supply unit of the
Series 15A, to control power on/off.
NOTE
When an input unit is not used, the capacity and the number
of connectors of the AC outputs for which power on/off is
controlled are shown in the figure below. When the capacity
or the number of connectors is insufficient, see section
5.2.3.
97

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
AMP (Japan)
21782883 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
AMP (Japan)
117828833 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
9 monochrome CRT (only 1 unit)

9 PDP
9.5 LCD
10.4 LCD
(1) CP1
The AC input connector for the control unit. The AC input
specifications are as follows:
R and S: 200 to 240 VAC +10%/15%, 1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz " 3 Hz
G: Grounding (class 3 or better)
NOTE
The above specifications may be limited depending on the
device powered from CP2 or CP3.
(2) CP2 and CP3
The connectors for AC outputs for which power on/off is synchronized
with the power on/off of the control unit.
The AC output specifications are the same as the AC input for CP1.
The AC input specifications for CP1 may be limited depending on the
AC input specifications for a device connected to CP2 or CP3.
98

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
Example) When a device of 200/220 VAC (which does not accept 240
V) is connected to CP2, the AC input specification for CP1
is also 200/220 VAC.
The total AC output from CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.
When the capacity is insufficient, see section 5.2.3.
(3) CP4
The connector for controlling the power. The poweron and
poweroff buttons are connected here.
(a) Power on/off (EON, EOF, and COM)
Turns on and off the power to the control unit.
(Time conditions)
TOFON
TON
Between
EON
and COM
Between
EOF and
COM
Shorted
Open
TON y 500msec
TOFF
Shorted
Open
(Power is on.) (Power is off.)
TOFF y 500msec
TOFON y 5sec
(power is on.)
(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (The minimum load is 2
mA or lower.)
(b) Alarm input (AL and OFF)
Receives an alarm signal from outside the control unit to turn off
the power to the system. Input a contact signal which is closed
when an alarm occurs.
(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 30 VDC or more (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or more (The minimum load is 1
mA or less.)
(c) Alarm output (FA and FB)
Shorts FA and FB when an abnormality is found in the power
supply unit for the control unit, for example, when the fuse for
direct current output blows or when an excessive voltage or current
is detected at the direct current output. When an alarm input
(between AL and OFF) is closed, FA and FB are also shorted. This
signal is held until the poweroff button is pressed or the input
power (AC input of the power supply unit) is turned off. When this
signal is output, the power to the control unit is turned off and the
poweron button is disabled.
(Contact ratings) 50 VDC or less
0.5 A or less
50 VAC or less
5 VA or less
(4) CP5
+24 VDC power output
Connector for +24 VDC power displays (9 CRT/PDP, 9.5 LCD,
10.4 LCD)
99

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
(5) CP6
The connector for the +24 VDC power output for the machine
interface I/O (connection unit, operators panel connection unit, etc.).
The DC output supplied from CP6 is up to 3 A.
5.2.2
When an Input Unit is
Used
The power supply unit of the Series 15B has the power on/off control
function.
However, when an external input unit is used, the poweron and
poweroff buttons may not be connected to the power supply unit. In this
case, the following connection is recommended. The signals ON, OFF,
and COM are wired together. This means that the power supply unit
operates while its AC input power is supplied to CP1.
(1) For other than multiaxis machines
External input unit
CP1 (Input of 200 to 240 VAC)
CP4 (Power control)
AMP (Japan)
11781283
Poweron
and
poweroff
buttons
200 to 240 VAC

1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz
AMP (Japan)
21781296
NOTE
As shown in the above figure, when external input unit
A14B0076B001 is used, the number of AC output
connectors for which power on/off is controlled increases
but the capacity of the AC input fuse in the input unit and that
in the power supply unit is the same (10 A for power supply
B1). This input unit therefore cannot be used in order to
increase the capacity of the AC output for which power
on/off is controlled.
100

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
When the A14B0076B001 is used as an input unit, connect the input

unit to the power supply unit as shown below.
Fuses
X
X
X
U, V, W Servo
threephase input
Not
used
200 to 240 VAC

1f
Magnetic contactor
200/220 VAC with power

on/off controlled
MCC
0.3A
To servo
transformer
Y
Y
TP1
CP2
ON
OFF
EON
R, S, G
CP1
(6P, black)
Series 15B
EOF
COM
FA
CP21
FB
TP2
The input unit is within the dotted lines.

TP1 and TP2: M4 screw terminals
CP11
CP22
CP12
CP23
CP13
CP25
PA
CP26
PB
200 to 240 VAC with power

on/off controlled
NOTE
Refer to the Series 15A Connection Manual for details of
the input unit connectors.
101

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
(2) For multiaxis machines

When using multiaxis machines, be sure to use the input unit as two
power supply units are controlled.
When A14B0076B401 (15MB for multiaxis machines) is used as
the input unit, it is connected to the power unit as follows:
FA15MODEL B Multiple
axis input unit
FS15MODEL B Main
cabinet
Power supply unit
CPI (AC input)
CPDI (AC output)
CP4 (Power supply

control)
CPD2B (Power supply

control)
FS15MODEL B Additional
cabinet
CPD2C (Power supply
control)
Power supply unit

CPI (AC input)
CP4 (Power supply

control)
CPD2A (Power supply

control)
POWER
BUTTON
ON
POWER
BUTTON OFF
(Note)
ALARM INPUT
HOUSING
AMP (JAPAN)
CONTACT
ALARM OUTPUT
102

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.2.3
When AC Output
Terminals for Which
Power On/Off is
Controlled are
Insufficient
Through the CP2 and CP3 connectors, the power supply unit can output
a total AC current of up to 2.5 A subject to power on/off is control.
When the number of connectors or the capacity of the output from the
power unit is insufficient, the following connection is recommended:
Power supply unit

200 to 240 VAC, 1f
200B
200A
Ground
AMP (Japan)
M4 screw
terminals
11781283 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
CP91
3
G
FCI Japan
200B
SMS3PWS5 (Housing)
200A
Y
Y
CP3 (AC output)
10A
RC16MSCT3 (Contact)
Expanded power input unit
CP92 CP93 CP94 CP95 CP96
FCI Japan
SMS3PWS5 (Housing)
RC16MSCT3 (Contact)
Pin assignment layout for the
CP92 to CP96 connectors
3
200B
200A
Expanded input unit : A14B0076B209
103
200 to 240 VAC with power

on/off controlled

UNIT CONNECTION
5.2.4
B62073E/04
Power ON the power supplies in the following order or simultaneously:
Power ON Sequence
1 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool
2 Power supply (I/O UnitMODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O
devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)
for servo amplifier
3 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit
Leave the memory backup battery and separate absolute pulse coder
battery connected regardless of the ON/OFF state of the control unit
power supply. If these batteries are removed with the control unit turned
OFF, parameters, part programs, pulse coder position data and other data
stored on the control unit will be lost.
For details, see 3.7.3 Replacing the battery.
5.2.5
Power OFF the power supplies in the following order:
Power OFF Sequence

1 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit
2 Power supply (I/O UnitMODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O
devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)
for servo amplifier
3 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool
The motor cannot be controlled when the power is turned OFF or if a

power interruption occurs. Adopt the required corrective action on the
machine tool for trouble that arises from the inability to control the motor.
For example, insert a brake to prevent the shaft from falling when the shaft
operating in the gravity shaft direction is being controlled. The brake
clamps the motor when the servo has not started up or when the motor is
not operating, and unclamps the motor only while it is operating. In other
words, the servo motor is normally clamped when a power OFF or power
interruption prevents servo axis control. The axis being controlled may
fall in the time up to activation of the motor clamp relay. So, you must
evaluate whether or not the amount that the axis falls is a problem.
NOTE
When the MMCIV and intelligent terminal are used, shut
down the OS before you turn the control unit OFF. If the
power is turned OFF during accessing of the hard disk or
while the operating system is still running, data on the hard
disk is more likely to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs.
104

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.3
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
STANDALONE
CABINET A
5.3.1
Input Unit Layout
Input PCB
Input fuse for servo amp.
Input fuse for control unit

Input Unit
(A14B0076B004, B005, B008)
5.3.2
Connection to
Input Units
(A14B0076B004,
B005, and B008)
(1) Terminal Unit TP1

GND
AC200/220V 3f 60Hz
or AC200V 3f 50Hz
M5 screw Terminal 4
These terminals are for AC power input. The cabinet must be

equipped with a breaker or fuse to protect the wiring against
overcurrents. Provide a ground of class 3 or higher.
105

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04

EON
EOF
COM
FA
FB
M5 screw Terminal 5
(a) EON, EOF, COM : External power supply ON/OFF Terminal

The external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off the
power supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is as
follows:
EON
POWER
ON
Input unit
EOF
POWER
OFF
COM
Remove this connection.
External power supply ON/OFF Signal
The following figure shows the timing chart according to which the
external power is turned on and off.
Tofon
EONCOM
EOFCOM
Ton
Toff
(Power ON)
(Power OFF)
Ton y 500msec
Toff y 500msec
Tofon y 5sec
The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal
The contacts used for turning on and off the external power must
conform to the following specifications:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (with minimum load of
2 mA or lower)
106

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
(b) FA and FB: Fuse alarm signal

A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in the
power unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent is
detected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are also
shortcircuited if an alarm signal is input from CP6. The fuse
alarm signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC
is turned off or the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and the
POWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are disabled.
The connection is as follows:
Input Unit
Contact voltage rating

DC 50V or lower
DC 0.5V or lower
AC 50V or lower
AC 5VA or lower
FA
FB
Fuse alarm signal

R
EMG
IN1
EMG
IN2
EMG
OUT1
EMG
OUT2
EXR
EXS
M4 screw Terminal 8
(a) R and S
These terminals are used for singlephase 200VAC input to the
control unit. The connection is normally as follows:
F1
TP4
F2
TP1
Remove this connection when using separate sources for the

threephase AC input (for the servo amplifier) and the
singlephase 200 VAC input (for the control unit).
107

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
(b) EMGIN1, 2 Note 1)

Connect to the 100VAC (MCC) terminals of the servo amplifier,
as shown below:
Standalone cabinet
AC100 V
Emergency stop
EMGIN1
To MCC terminals of
the servo amplifier in
the standalone cabinet
EMGIN2
Prepare an external 100VAC power

source, and connect in series with the
emergency stop contactor.
(c) EMGOUT1, 2
Not used.
(d) EXR and EXS (Note)
These terminals are for ON/OFFcontrolled, singlephase
200/220 VAC output. Connect this output to an electromagnetic
contactor such that the servo amplifier power source, installed
outside the cabinet, can be turned on and off together with the NC
power. The current must not exceed 0.3 mA.
NOTE
These terminals are used to connect the additional cabinet
when use of the timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is
specified. In this case, two cables may be connected to one
terminal.
(4) Connector CP4
When the cabinet is equipped with a builtin tape reader, this terminal
is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the tape reader is
installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for power input.
108

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.3.3
Connection to the
Control Unit
The following units can be mounted in the standalone cabinet. Necessary

control unit PCB connections are completed at the factory.
Unit
PCB
Connector
Function
Remark
9 monochrome
CRT unit
PSU
MAIN
MAIN
CP5
JA1
JA2
DC24V
CRT
MDI
Note 1)
Connection unit
PSU
PMC
CP6
JD1A
DC24E
IOLINK
Note 2)
Tape reader
MAIN
JD5B
RS2322
Punch panel
MAIN
JD5A
RS2321
APC battery
(1 pc only)
MAIN
JA4A
APCBAT
Servo amp.
MAIN
SUB
JV1 to 4
JV5 to 8
AMP1 to 4
AMP5 to 8
Note 3)
PSU : Power supply unit

MAIN : Main CPU board
PMC: PMC board
SUB : Sub board
NOTE
1 Can be used for power input when the 9 monochrome CRT
unit is installed outside the cabinet.
2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is
installed outside the cabinet.
3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the
ordered specifications.
109

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.4
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
STANDALONE
CABINET B
5.4.1
Input Unit Layout
Input Unit (A14B0076B411)
110

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.4.2
Connection to Input
Unit (A14B0076B411)
(1) Terminal Unit TB2 (M4 terminal)

(a) R, S
These terminals are for singlephase 200/220 VAC input to devices
to which power is supplied from the control unit (main and
additional lockers) and the input unit.
(b) 200A, 200B Note)
200/220 VAC output.
Connect these terminals to an
electromagnetic contactor such that the servo amplifier power
source, installed outside the cabinet, can be turned on and off
together with the NC power.
NOTE
specified.
(c) INT1. INT2 Note)

These are the door interlock terminals, used for cabinets other than
standalone cabinet B. When the two terminals are open, the NC
power is off.
NOTE
specified.
(d) EON, EOF, COM1 : External power ON/OFF terminal

The external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off the
power supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is as
follows:
EON
POWER
ON
Input unit
EOF
POWER
OFF
COM
Remove this connection.
External power supply ON/OFF Signal
The following figure shows the timing chart according to which the
external power is turned on and off.
111

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
Tofon
EONCOM
EOFCOM
Ton
Toff
(Power ON)
(Power OFF)
Ton y 500msec
Toff y 500msec
Tofon y 5msec
The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal
The contacts used for turning on and off the external power must
conform to the following specifications:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher
(with minimum load of 2 mA or lower)
(e) EMGPIT1. 2
Not used.
(f) 200R1, 200S1, and COM2
These terminals are for input unit internal connections.
(2) Terminal unit TB3 (Faston terminal)
This is the door interlock terminal used for standalone cabinet B. The
terminal is used when use of the door interlock (A02B0116J001) is
specified.
(3) PCB1 (A17B16000580)
(a) Connector CPD1 (AMP housing: 11781283, contact:
11752185)
This terminal is used to supply singlephase 200/220 VAC to the
main and additional lockers. These connections are made at the
factory.
(b) Connecter CPD2A
(A1 to A3: AMP Housing 21781283, Contact 11752182)
(B1 to B3: AMP Housing 21781283, Contact 11752182)
A1
ON
B1
AL
A2
OFF
B2
FA
A3
COM
B3
FB
ON, OFF, COM (A1 to A3)

These terminals are connected at the factory.
112

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
FA, FB: Fuse alarm output signal (B1 to B3)

A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in the
power unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent is
detected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are also
shortcircuited if an alarm signal is input from AL. The fuse alarm
signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC is
turned off or the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and the
POWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are
invalidated. The connection is as follows:
Input Unit
FA
FB
Contact voltage rating

DC 50V or lower
DC 0.5V or lower
AC 50A or lower
AC 5VAor lower
Fuse alarm signal
(c) Connector CPD2B

(AMP Housing 21781296, Contact
11752182)
This terminal is used for the control signals that turn on and off the
main locker power. The connection to the main cabinet is
completed at the factory.
(d) Connector CPD2C
(AMP Housing 21781296, Contact
11752182)
This terminal is for the control signals that turn on and off the
additional locker power. The connection to the additional cabinet
is completed at the factory.
(4) PCB2 (A20B10010210)
CP91 to CP96 (connector: FCI Japan, housing: SMS3PK5, contact:
RC16M23T3 or RC16MSCT3)
(a) Connector CP91
This terminal is for ON/OFFcontrolled, singlephase 200/220
VAC input. This connection is completed at the factory.
(b) Connector CP92
This terminal is connected to the 200A and 200B terminals of
terminal unit TB2.
(c) Connector CP93
This terminal is for power supply (120 W) to the cooling fan of the
standalone cabinet.
(d) Connector CP94
When the cabinet is equipped with a builtin tape reader, this
terminal is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the
tape reader is installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for
power input.
Power requirement of builtin tape reader: 110 VA (without reel)
130 VA (with reel)
113

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
(e) Connector CP95, CP96

200/220 VAC output. They are used for power supply to external
units. The rating of each terminal must be set such that the total of
the ratings of CP92 to PC96 does not exceed 1.4 kVA.
5.4.3
The following units can be mounted in standalone cabinet B and

additional lockers. All necessary PCB connections in the control unit (of
the main and additional lockers) are completed at the factory.
Connection to Control
Unit
Unit
Lockers
PCB
Connector
Function
Remark
9 monochrome CRT unit
MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
PSU
MAIN
MAIN
CP5
JA1
JA2
DC24V
CRT
MDI
Note 1)
Connection unit
MAIN
MAIN
PSU
PMC
CP6
JD1A
DC24E
IOLINK
Note 2)
Tape reader
MAIN
MAIN
JD5B
RS2322
Punch panel
MAIN
MAIN
JD5A
RS2321
APC battery (1 pc only)
ADD
MAIN
JA4A
APCBAT
Servo amp.
ADD
AXIS
JV1 to 4
AMP1 to 4
MAIN
: Main Cabinet
ADD
: Additional Cabinet
PSU
: Power supply unit
MAIN
: Main CPU board
PMC
: PMC board
AXIS
: Axis CPU board
Note 3)
NOTE
1 Can be used for power input when the 9 monochrome CRT
unit is installed outside the cabinet.
2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is
installed outside the cabinet.
3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the
ordered specifications.
114

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
5.5
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
ADDITIONAL
CABINET A
5.5.1
Input Unit Layout
LC2
GND
U V
Electromagnetic
Contactor
SK2
Spark
Killer
F17
F18 F19
Fuse for servo amp.
Terminal unit
GND
T1
TA
NOTE
Terminal unit T1 is not installed when using the
A02B0075J141 or J144 input terminal.
115

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
Input unit order drawing numbers and unit drawing numbers
5.5.2
unit order drawing number
unit drawing number
A02B0075J141, J144
A02B0075C006
A02B0075J142, J145
A02B0075C007
(1) Connection of threephase power for the servo amplifier
Cable Connection
[Connection to the
Input Unit
(A02B0075J141,
J142, J144, and
J145)]
Connect the threephase power for

the servo amplifier to these terminals
(M6 screw terminals).
U
GND
AC200/220V 3f 60Hz
or AC200V 3f 50Hz
Note) Provide a ground of
class 3 or higher.
Electromagnetic
Contactor
LC2
Fuse
F17 to F19
Connected to the line filters or servo

terminal units.
(2) Terminal unit T1 (M4 screw terminal)

Not used.
(3) Terminal unit TA (M4 screw terminal)
10
11
12
IN
OUT
100V
IN
OUT
DOOR INT. LOCK
200V
The terminals of the upper row are used for connecting wires inside the
cabinet, and those of the lower row are used for connecting external
devices.
NOTE
In the following text, the terms previous cabinet and next
cabinet refer to the cabinets shown below:
116

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)
Additional
cabinet
Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)
Additional
cabinet
Next cabinet (the

cabinet connected
after that being
considered)
Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)
Main cabinet
Next cabinet (the

cabinet connected
after that being
considered)
Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)
Additional
cabinet
Next cabinet (the

cabinet connected
after that being
considered)
Additional
cabinet
Next cabinet (the

cabinet connected
after that being
considered)
(a) Terminal 1 to 4
These terminals are for 100 VAC (MCC) connection for the servo
amplifier.
The connections are as follows:
To each servo amplifier in the cabinet
These terminals receive

100 VAC from the previous
cabinet, etc. Depending on
the previous cabinet, the
connection differs as
follows:
These terminals
supply 100 VAC to the
next cabinet.
These connections are
made at the factory.
a. When the previous cabinet is an additional cabinet:

These connections are made at the factory.
b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the
timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is specified:
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B:
Prepare an external 100VAC power source and connect it in
series with the emergency stop contactor, as shown below.
117

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
EMERGENCY stop
Contactor
AC100 V
(b) Terminal 5 to 8
These terminals are for ON/OFFcontrolled singlephase 200 JAC
input, used for controlling the electromagnetic contactors for the
cabinet fan and servo amplifier power. Connections are as follows:
N
LC2
1c2
These terminals receive 200

VAC from the previous
cabinet, etc. Depending on
the previous cabinet, the
connection differs as
follows:
These terminals supply

200 VAC to the next
cabinet. These
connections are made
at the factory.

b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and the
118

UNIT CONNECTION
B62073E/04
(c) Terminal 9 to 12
These terminals are for the door interlock. The connections are as
follows:
When the door interlock

(A02B0075J052) is specified,
these connections are made at
the factory.
These terminals supply the door interlock signal

to the next cabinet. When there is no next
cabinet, terminals 3 and 4 are shortcircuited.
These connections are completed at the factory.
These terminals receive the door

interlock signal from the previous
cabinet. Depending on the previous
cabinet, the connection differs.

b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the door
interlock (A02B0076J204) is specified:
Connections are completed at the factory.
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and the
119
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE
120

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.1
OUTLINE
The Series 15B can be combined with the units shown in the table below
as I/O units for the machine interface.
The I/O units for the FANUC I/O Link are installed separately from the
control unit, and connected with the control unit using the dedicated serial
FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately. By placing the connection unit for the operators panel near
the operators panel, an operators panel that inputs/outputs many signals
can be interfaced easily.
The FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A is a modulartype I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals. (Note that this manual covers only part of the uses
that the FANUC I/O Link has. For example, although it can be used for
connecting the 1axis CNC FANUC Power Mate or cell controller
FANUC FD Mate, this manual does not mention it. This is because the
purpose of this manual is to describe the I/O units having machine
interface.)
Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O
Type
Name
DI/DO points
FANUC I/O Link FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A

Max. 256/256 per group
compatible I/O
FANUC I/O Unit MODEL B (Note)
Max 1024/1024 in total
Max.
Operators Panel Connection Unit
Connection Unit
NOTE
Refer to FANUC I/O Unit MODEL B Connecting Manual
(B62123E).
121

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
FANUC Link Compatible I/O
Series 15B
Control Unit
FANUC
I/O Link
FANUC
I/O Link
I/O Unit
MODEL A
I/O Unit
MODEL A
Operators
panel connection
unit
Machine Tool
Fig. 6.1 FANUC I/O Link compatible I/O
122
Machine
Operators
Panel

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.2
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O LINK
In the I/O Link there are the master station and its slave stations. The
master is the control unit of the CNC, and the slaves are the I/O unit and
interface unit for the operators panel. The slaves are divided into groups,
and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of
two base I/O unitMODEL A can be connected as a group. The operators
panel connection unit and connection unit are each counted as one group.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O
points is 1024.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units. A cable is always connected from JD1A of a unit
to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B of the last unit is not used and
left open, it need not be connected with a terminator.
(A terminator is needed for the last interface module of each group of the
I/O UnitMODEL A.)
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
123

MACHINE INTERFACE
CNC
B62073E/04
JD1A
I/O = 256/256 or less per group

FANUC I/O Link
I/O = 1024/1024 or less in total
FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A 2 max
Base unit 1
Base unit 2
JD1B
Magnetic
circuit
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
Connection
JD1A unit 1
Up to 16
groups
Connection
unit 2
JD1B Operators panel

JD1A connection unit
Fig. 6.2 I/O Link connection diagram
124
Machine
operators
panel

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.2.1
Control unit or preceding slave unit
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric
Cable
Next slave
unit
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
CABLE WIRING
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
SIN
SOUT
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SOUT
0V
*SIN
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
SHIELD
GROUND PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL

A66L00010284#10P
(#28AWG10pair)
125

MACHINE INTERFACE
6.2.2
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Optical
Fiber Cable
B62073E/04
The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
(when a relay is not used) with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O
link adapter.
NOTE
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D
D
When the cable is more than 15 meters long.

When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is impossible to
connect the cabinets with a grounding wire of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; for
example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cable
such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a long
distance in parallel with the cable.
(1) External dimension of optical link adapter
The standard type (A13B0154B001) and highspeed type
(A13B0154B002) are the same.
66.0
40.0
FANUC
Optical connector
COP1
18.0
Connector
for unit
connecting
JD1
7.0
45.0
4M3
(2) Weight of optical link adapter

Main body: Approx. 100 g
126

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(3) Connection
(a) Connection diagram
JD1
Unit
JD1A
JD1
Connecting
cable between
units
COP1
Unit
COP1
Optical
cable
Optical I/O
link adapter
Optical I/O
link adapter
JD1B
Connecting
cable between
units
(b) Interunit connecting cables

Unit side
JD1A, JD1B
Adapter side
JD1
(1) Recommended connector for cable side: PCRE20FS (made by HONDA

Communication Co., Ltd.)
(2) Recommended cable (wire material):
A66L00010284#10P
(3) Cable length:
Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
(c) Optical cable

(i) Specification: A66L 6001 0009#L5R003
A66L 6001 0009#L10R03
A66L 6001 0009#L15R03
(ii)Cable length: Max. 200 m (standard type)
Max. 100 m (highspeed type)
127
length 5 m
length 10 m
length 15 m

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
NOTE
The minimum bending radius of the optical fiber cable is 25
mm. Take care not to excessively twist the optical fiber
cable.
(4) Maximum number of stages
When a conventional optical I/O link adapter (standard type) is used
on the I/O link, up to five stages can be connected. Up to 16 stages can
be connected when the highspeed type is used.
1) Standard type (A13B0154B001) Maximum number of stage: 5
2) Highspeed type (A13B0154B002) Maximum number of
stages: 16
NC or
I/O Unit
Optical I/O
link adapter
Optical I/O
link adapter
NC or
I/O Unit
Optical I/O
link adapter
Optical I/O
link adapter
NC or
I/O Unit
1 stage
NOTE
Highspeed type adapters cannot be mixed with standard
type adapters on the same line.
(5) Power source
(a) Power voltage:
4.75 V to 5.25 V (at the receiving end)
(b) Consumption current:
200 mA
(6) Installation conditions
(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with
the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link
adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact
with other circuits to prevent possible shortcircuits. When
mounting the optical link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an
Ltype fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical link
adapter.
L fifting
128

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(7) Required parts

(a) For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the
following parts are necessary:
(i) Optical I/O link adapter
2
(ii)Interunit connecting cable 2
(iii)Optical cable
1
(8) Relay using the optical fiber connection adapter
(a) External dimensions of optical fiber connection adapter
(b) Example of how to use the optical fiber connection adapter

Optical fiber connection
adapter
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable
Mounting plate
NOTE
Only one relay connection can be made.
The optical fiber connection adapter cannot be used when
highspeed type optical link adapters are used.
129

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(c) Maximum transfer distance over the optical fiber cable

The following table shows the maximum transfer distance over the
optical fiber cable. This distances varies according to the number
of relay connections made using the connection adapter.
Standard type
Highspeed type
130
Number of Relays
Maximum Transfer Distance
200 m
100 m (total)
100 m
Not allowed

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.3
The FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A (I/O unit) is a modulartype I/O unit.

It interfaces the Series 16/18 with the machine when connected to the
control unit of the Series 15B control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unit
can be configured by mounting the I/O modules required for either the 5
or 10slot base unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so appropriate
modules can be selected according to the use, points, voltage level,
current capacity, and signal specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for further
information.
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O
UNITMODEL A
6.3.1
Structure of FANUC I/O
UnitMODEL A
Base Unit ABU05A (5 slots) or ABU10A (10 slots)
I/F
Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)
Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B
AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link

AIF01B expands I/O units in the same group.
131
10

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.3.2
Outer Dimensions
f 5 (mounting hole)
6.3.3
Mounting and
Dismounting Modules
For 5slot base unit (ABU05A)
253
238
For 10slot base unit (ABU10A)
430
415
Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to

and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
(1) Mounting
(a) Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper
side of the base unit.
(b) Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
(c) Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.
132

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(2) Dismounting
(a) Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the
module.
(b) Push the module upwards.
133

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.3.4
Connection Diagram
Series 15B
Control unit
JD1A
Terminator TX
K1X
I/O UnitA
I/O UnitA
AIF01A
AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A
JD3
JD2
JD2
CP32
CP32
DC24 V
DC24 V
K2X
K1X
AIF01A
Max. 16
AIF01B
JD1B
groups
JD1A
JD3
JD2
JD2
CP32
CP32
DC24 V
DC24 V
K2X
AIF01A
AIF01B
K1X
JD1B
JD1A
JD3
JD2
JD2
CP32
CP32
DC24 V
DC24 V
K2X
134

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See 6.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link and 6.3.11
Number of I/O points for the I/O UnitMODEL A.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
3 Terminate connector JD2 of the last interface module
(AIF01B) of the group by using a terminator. See 6.3.7, (3).
6.3.5
Connecting Input
Power Source
Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the

interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
D
D
Voltage : DC24 V " 10%

Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.
FCI Japan tripolar
connector (Brown)
AIF01A / AIF01B
CP32
1
+24 V
GND
Housing:
SMS3PNS5
Contact:
RC16MSCT3
DC24 V
NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.
ON
Power for the master
device
OFF
t
ON
Power for the I/O unit
OFF
t : more than 500 ms (Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500 ms or less.)
135

MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.6
B62073E/04
(1) Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grounding
ABU05A, ABU10A
ABU05B, ABU10B
M4 screw terminal
for grounding
SG terminal
(M3 screw terminal)
M4 mounting hole
for grounding
136

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(2) When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module
Required current (mA) of +24 V
Mod le name
Module
A
AIF01A
50
AIF01B
50
AID32A
20+0.5n
30+7.5n
AID32B
20+0.5n
30+7.5n
AID16C
AID16D
AID32E
AID32F
AIA16G
5+1.5n
AOD08C
5+2n
AOD08D
5+2n
AOD16C
5+2n
AOD16D
5+2n
AOD32C
5+0.5n
AOD32D
5+0.5n
AOA05E
5+5.5n
AOA08E
5+5.5n
AOA12F
5+4.5n
AOR08G
10n
AOR16G
10n
AAD04A
130
n: Number of the input and output points (for each module) which
turn ON simultaneously
D
D
The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should

not exceed 500 mA.
The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.
137

MACHINE INTERFACE
6.3.7
Connecting Signal
Cables
B62073E/04
Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
connection diagram are as follows.
(1) Cable K1X
AIF01A
CNC or AIF01A
Connector HONDA TSUSIN

PCRE20FS
(a) Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT
and *SOUT.
(b) Recommended cable material:
A66L00010284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)
(c) Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of
the cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
(d) Maximum cable length: 10 m
(e) Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
(f) Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases]:
138

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(i) When the cable is more than 10 meters long.

(ii)When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
(iii)When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong
noise.
(2) Cable K2X
AIF01B
AIF01A

PCRE20FS
(a) Connect the signals with the same name.

(b) Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
139

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(c) Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
(d) Recommended cable material:
A66L00010284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)
(e) Maximum cable length: 2 m
(3) Terminator TX

PCRE20FS
(a) Terminate the connector JD2 of the last AIF01B in a

single group with the terminator.
(b) Shortcircuit the TRM1 signals as shown. Repeat the
shorting procedure for signals TRM2 and TRM3.
140

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.3.8
Connecting with I/O
Modules
For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
Terminal block type
Connector type
Input/Output
display LED
A 0 . . . 7
B 0 . . . 7
Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA TSUSIN
MR50RMA
M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminals)
(1) The terminal block is a removable type.

(a) Dismounting the terminal block
(i) Open the cover of the terminal block.
(ii)Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
(iii)Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.
141

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(b) Mounting the terminal block

(i) Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block
in the groove of the module side.
(ii)Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the
protruding portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the
module firmly.
(iii)Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the
latch at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.
(2) Cautionary points when wiring terminal block type

(a) Wiring material: AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75mm2)
A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
(b) Crimp style terminal: M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation
sleeve and a short distance A, as
illustrated in the drawing below, is
recommended.
A
(c) Mark tube: As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part
with the mark tube.
142

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.3.9
(1) Digital input modules
Digital Input/Output
Module
Input type
Non
insulation
DC input
Insulation
type DC
input
AC input
Module
name
Rated
voltage
Rated
current
Polarity
Response
time
Points
External
connection
LED
display
AID32A
24 VDC
7.5 mA
Both
Maximum
20 ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AID32B
24 VDC
7.5 mA
Both
Maximum
2 ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AID16C
24 VDC
7.5 mA
NEG
Maximum
20 ms
16
Terminal
block
provided
AID16D
24 VDC
7.5 mA
POS
Maximum
20 ms
16
Terminal
block
provided
AID32E
24 VDC
7.5 mA
Both
Maximum
20 ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AID32F
24 VDC
7.5 mA
Both
Maximum
2 ms
32
Connector
not
provided
AIA16G
100 to
120 VAC
10.5 mA
(120 VAC)
16
Terminal
block
provided
ON Max 35 ms
OFF Max 45 ms
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative: 0 V common (current source type)
The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive: 24 V common (current sink type)
The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A
Connection/Maintenance Manual (B61813E).
143

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(2) Digital output modules

Output
type
Insulation
type DC
output
AC
output
Module
name
Rated
voltage
Rated
current
Polarity
Points
Points/
common
External
connection
LED
display
Fuse
AOD08C
2A
NEG
Terminal
block
provided
provided
AOD08D
2A
POS
Terminal
block
provided
provided
AOD16C
0.5A
NEG
16
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
AOD16D
0.5A
POS
16
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
AOD32C
0.3A
NEG
32
Connector
not
provided
not
provided
AOD32D
0.3A
POS
32
Connector
not
provided
not
provided
AOA05E
2A
Terminal
block
provided
provided
1A
Terminal
block
provided
provided
0.5A
12
Terminal
block
provided
provided
4A
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
2A
16
Terminal
block
provided
not
provided
12 to 24
VDC
100 to 240
VAC
AOA08E
AOA12F
AOR08G
Relay
output
AOR16G
100 to 120
VAC
Maximum
250 VAC/
30 VDC
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative: 0 V common (current sink type)
Output is at low level when ON.
Positive: 24 V common (current source type)
Output is at high level when ON.
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A
Connection/Maintenance Manual (B61813E).
144

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.3.10
Correspondence
between I/O Signals
and Addresses in a
Module
Bit
Address in
the module
7
0
A7
6
A6
5
A5
4
A4
3
A3
2
A2
1
A1
0
A0
Module of
8 points
Module of
16 points
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Module of
32 points
Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address

as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes 1 when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is 1.
6.3.11
Number of I/O Points
for I/O UnitMODEL A
Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O UnitMODEL A using the
following.
(1) Output points
Sum of the actual output
points in a group
D 0 to 32
D 40 to 64
D 72 to 128
D 136 to 256
Occupied output points

32 points
64 points
128 points
256 points
NOTE
Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
(2) Input points

Sum of the actual input
points in a group
D 0 to 32
D 40 to 64
D 72 to 128
D 136 to 256
145
Occupied input points

32 points
64 points
128 points
256 points

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
However, as a result of the calculation above, when the number of

input points is not larger than that of the output points in a single
group, the number of input points is assumed to be equal to that of
the output points.
Example 1: When the following modules are used in the group
No. 0
AOD32C 3
AID32A 5
AOA12F 2
AIA16G 3
[Output points]
323+162 = 128 128 points
[Input points]
325+163 = 208 256 points
Example 2: When the following modules are used in the group
No. 2.
AOD16C 7
AID16C 4
AOA05E 9
AIA16G 3
[Output points]
167+89 = 184 256 points
[Input points]
164+163 = 112 128 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal
to that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.
146

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.4
CONNECTING THE
CONNECTION UNIT
A connection unit (A20B10050310 or A20B10030200) is

connected to the control unit of the Series 15B via FANUC I/O Link and
used for interfacing with the machine.
Electrical interfaces and pin assignment for connectors C01 to C05 and
C09 to C13 used for interfacing with the machine are fully compatible
with the connection unit of the Series 15A. The numbers of input and
output points for each configuration are listed below.
Name
Ordering code
Input
Output
Connection unit 1
A02B10050310
96
64
Connection unit 1
+
Connection unit 2
A20B10050310
+
A20B10030200
192
128
Ground the connection unit 1/2.
M4 screw
147

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
A20B10050310
Series 15B
control unit
To the next device
or
I/O unit
If there is no equipment beyond this

connection unit, JD1A can remain open.
3pin connector (brown)

manufactured by
FCI Japan
Housing: SMS3PNS5
Contact: RC16MSCT3
To the machine
Connection unit 2
A20B10030200
Power input specifications

Voltage:
24 VDC " 10%
Capacity: 670 + 7.3 n (mA): When only connection unit 1 is
used
1150 + 7.3 n (mA): When connection unit 1 and
connection unit 2 are used
n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned
on
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power
cable.
148

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.4.1
(a) Between CP52 and CP55
Connecting
Connection Unit 1 and
Connection Unit 2
CP52
1
+5 V
+5 V
0V
0V
CP55
5
+24 V +24 N
+5 V
+5 V
0V
0V
+24 V +24 N
Connectors SMS6PN5
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.
149

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(b) Between CDD1 and CDD2

Connection Unit 1
Connection Unit 2
CDD1
FAP501
A01
0V
CDD2
FAP501
B01
0V
A01
0V
B01
A02
B02
A02
B02
A03
B03
A03
B03
B04
A04
A04
0V
A05
B05
A06
B06
0V
Cable
0V
0V
B04
A05
B05
A06
B06
0V
A07
*D7
B07
*D6
A07
*D7
B07
*D6
A08
*D5
B08
*D5
A08
*D5
B08
*D5
A09
0V
B09
*D3
A09
0V
B09
*D3
A10
*D2
B10
*D1
A10
*D2
B10
*D1
A11
*D0
B11
0V
A11
*D0
B11
0V
A12
0V
B12
0V
A12
0V
B12
0V
A13
AU
B13
A4
A13
AU
B13
A4
A14
A3
B14
0V
A14
A3
B14
0V
A15
A2
B15
A1
A15
A2
B15
A1
A16
A0
B16
0V
A16
A0
B16
0V
A17
*OE
B17
0V
A17
*OE
B17
0V
A18
0V
B18
0V
A18
0V
B18
0V
A19
*DVWE
B19
0V
A19
*DVWE
B19
0V
A20
0V
B20
A20
0V
B20
A21
0V
B21
0V
A21
0V
B21
0V
A22
*ALRO
B22
0V
A22
*ALRO
B22
0V
A23
*CLR
B23
EN
A23
*CLR
B23
EN
B24
0V
A24
B24
0V
A24
A25
*ASIO
B25
A25
*ASIO
B25
The following cable is available.

Name
Ordering code
Length
Cable
A02B0072K818
150mm
Maximum wire length: 1 m

Connectors at the ends of the cable:
FAS5017 (A63L00010209#50)
150

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.4.2
Input signals for the connection unit conform to a noninsulation type

interface. There are two input types: Direct current input signal A and
direct current input signal B.
Input Signal
Regulations for the
Connection Unit
Machine
(1) Direct current input signal A

Direct current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from the
machine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximity
switch.
(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the following
requirements:
Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mA
or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V or
less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(Including the voltage drop through the cable)
(b) Fig. 6.4.2 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
CNC
Direct
current input
signal
Filter and level
convention circuit
Receiver
output
signal
Logical 0 when the
contact is open
Logical 1 when the
contact is closed
+24 V
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.4.2 (a) Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.4.2 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.
(Signal)
(Signal)
Logical 1
(18 V or more)
Direct current
input signal closed
Logical 0
(6 V or less)
Open
Chattering of 5 ms or less is ignored
Receiver output signal
5 to 22 ms
5 to 22 ms
Fig. 6.4.2 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal
151

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(2) Direct current input signal B

Direct current input signal B is a signal sent from the machine to the
CNC and used at high speed.
requirements:
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open:
1 mA or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed:
2 V or less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(b) Fig. 6.4.2 (c) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
Machine
CNC
Receiver
output
Filter and level
conversion circuit
R
+24 V
Output transistor
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.4.2 (c) Receiver circuit
As shown in Fig. 6.4.2 (c), the common voltage for the connection
unit can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on the
machine.
(a) To use the connection unit with the +24 V common voltage
Connect
A with
B and
C with
D . Logical 0 when the
transistor is off. Logical 1 when the transistor is on.
(b) To use with the 0 V common voltage
Connect
A with
D and
B with
C . Logical 1 when the
transistor is off. Logical 0 when the transistor is on.
Fig. 6.4.2. (d) shows the time specifications for the signal.
Direct current
input signal
Logical 1
(18 V or higher)
Logical 0
(6 V or lower)
Logical 0
(6 V or higher)
Logical 1
(18 V or lower)
ON
OFF
(For +24 V common)
Receiver
output signal
2 ms max
2 ms max
Fig. 6.4.2 (d) Width and delay time of the input signal
152
(For 0 V common)

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.4.3
Output Signal
Regulations for the
Connection Unit
The output signals from the connection unit are used for driving relays and
light emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A semiconductor
contact is used as a driver. The output type is direct current output signal
A.
(1) Direct current output signal A
(a) Driver ratings
(i) Maximum load current when the output is on: 250 mA or less
including an instantaneous value
(ii)Maximum voltage drop when the output is on: 6IL (volts),
where IL is the load current
(Example) When IL = 250 mA, 6 0.25 = 1.5 (V)
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 50 V or less including
an instantaneous value
(iv) Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less
Machine
CNC
Relay
Regulated power
supply on the
machine
Semiconductor
contact
(b) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the machine,

mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20 cm or less).
When a capacitive load is connected to the machine, insert a serial
resistor to limit the current so that the rated current and voltage are
ensured even for an instantaneous value.
(c) When the lamp is turned on directly by the solidstate relay output,
a surge current may flow and damage the driver. Add a protective
circuit shown below so that the rated current and voltage are
ensured even for an instantaneous value.
Lamp
CNC
Semiconductor
Protective resistor
Regulated power
supply
153

MACHINE INTERFACE
6.4.4
B62073E/04
(1) Connection unit 1
Connector Pin
Assignment for the
Connection Unit
C01
1
MR50RMA
2
DIB5
DIB1
DIB6
19
20
21
0V
DIB7
DIB4
33
34
35
36
37
+24
DIB2
DIB0
DIB3
COMI1
C02
22
23
38
24
39
25
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DI44
DI40
DI45
DI16
DI60
49
50
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DI26
DI37
DI06
DI33
DI50
DI62
51
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
DI32
DI36
DI31
DI35
DI30
DI34
DI63
DI61
15
DI56
MR50RMA
10
11
12
13
14
DI52
DI65
DI64
DI91
DI92
DI95
DI41
DI77
DI47
DI46
DI73
DI74
DI53
DI67
29
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
DI93
DI94
DI90
DI22
DI12
DI02
DI97
DI55
DI43
DI42
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
+24
DI07
DI17
DI27
DI23
DI13
DI03
DI96
DI57
DI70
C03
16
17
18
DI05
DI15
DI25
30
31
32
DI82
DI81
DI80
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
DI71
DI72
DI00
DI01
DI10
DI11
DI20
DI21
11
12
MR50RMA
10
DIA0
DIA1
DIA2
DI80
DI81
DI82
DI85
DI86
DI66
DI87
13
14
15
16
17
18
DIA7
DIA6
DO26
COM12
DO27
COM13
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DIA3
DIA4
DIA5
DI83
DO67
DO66
DO65
DO64
DO63
DO62
DO61
DO60
DO22
COM17
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
+24V
DI04
DI14
DI24
DI84
DI54
DI75
DI76
DO77
DO76
DO75
DO74
DO73
DO72
DO71
DO70
DO23
COM18
14
15
C04
MR50RMA
10
11
12
13
DO04
0V
0V
0V
DO03
COM1
COM16
DO57
DO55
DO54
DO56
DO12
MOM6
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
COM4
DO01
DO30
DO31
DO32
DO33
COM14
DO13
DO21
COM9
COM5
COM2
COM11
DO07
16
17
18
COM10
DO24
COM3
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
DO05
DO10
DO00
DO02
DO34
DO35
DO36
DO37
DO20
COM7
DO17
DO11
DO06
DO25
COM8
DO14
DO15
DO16
10
11
12
13
C05
1
MR20RMA
COM15 COM15
DO40
DO41
DO42
DO43
DO44
DO45
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DO46
DO47
DO50
DO51
DO52
DO53
154

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(2) Connection unit 2

C09
1
MR50RMA
2
DI75
DI71
DI76
19
20
21
10
11
12
13
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
DIE6
DIF7
DIC6
DIF3
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
DIF2
DIF6
DIF1
DIF5
0V
DI177
DI174
33
34
35
36
37
+24
DI172
DI170
DI173
COM12
C10
14
15
16
17
18
DI104
DI100
DI105
DID6
DI102
31
32
DI110
DI122
DI111
45
46
47
48
49
DIF0
DIF4
DI123
DI121
15
50
DI116
MR50RMA
10
11
12
13
14
DI112
DI125
DI124
DI151
DI152
DI155
DI101
DI137
DI107
DI106
DI133
DI134
DI113
DI127
29
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
DI153
DI154
DI150
DIE2
DID2
DIC2
DI157
DI115
DI103
DI102
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
+24
DIC7
DID7
DIE7
DIE3
DID3
DIC3
DI156
DI117
DI130
10
DI160
DI161
DI162
DI140
DI141
DI142
DI145
DI146
DI126
DI147
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
C11
16
17
18
DIC5
DID5
DIE5
30
31
32
DI142
DI141
DI140
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
DI131
DI132
DIC0
DIC1
DID0
DID1
DIE0
DIE1
11
12
MR50RMA
13
14
15
16
17
18
DI167
DI166
DOA6
COM30
DOA7
COM31
29
30
31
32
COM35
DI163
DI164
DI165
DI143
DOE7
DOE6
DOE5
DOE4
DOE3
DOE2
DOE1
DOE0
DOA2
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
+24
DIC4
DID4
DIE4
DI144
DI114
DI135
DI136
DOF7
DOF6
DOF5
DOF4
DOF3
DOF2
DOF1
DOF1
DOA3
COM36
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
DO84
0V
0V
0V
DO83
COM19
COM34
DOD7
DOD5
DOD4
DOD6
DO92
COM24
COM28
DOA4
COM21
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
DO87
C12
MR50RMA
COM22
DO81
DOB0
DOB1
DOB2
DOB3
COM32
DO93
DOA1
COM27
COM27
COM20
COM29
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
DO85
DO90
DO80
DO82
DOB4
DOB5
DOB6
DOB7
DOA0
COM25
DO97
DO91
DO86
DOA5
COM26
DO94
DO95
DO96
C13
1
MR20RMA
2
COM33 COM33
19
20
21
22
23
24
DOC0
DOC1
DOC2
DOC3
DOC4
DOC5
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
DOC6
DOC7
DOD0
DOD1
DOD2
DOD3
155

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.4.5
Details of the
Connection between
the Connection Unit
and the Machine
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.
156

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
157

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
DI82 to DI80 are assigned to two connector pins each.
158

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Address number
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal B
NOTE
The common voltage for DIB7 to DIB0 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on
the machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.
The common voltage is common to DIB7 to DIB0. It is therefore not possible to use a signal
with the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.
159

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO05 to DO00 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM1).
160

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
161

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DO21, DO20, and DO37 to DO30 are connected in connection unit
1 (COM14).
162

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DO22 and DO67 to DO60 are connected in connection unit 1
(COM17).
The common voltages for DO23 and DO77 to DO70 are connected in connection unit 1
(COM18).
163

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
C05 (15)
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DO47 to DO40 and DO53 to DO50 are connected in connection unit
1 (COM15).
164

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Address number
Connector pin number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
165

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
166

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
DI142 to DI140 are assigned to two connector pins each.
167

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltage for DI177 to DI170 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on
the machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.
The common voltage is common to DI177 to DI170. It is therefore not possible to use a signal
with the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.
168

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current input

signal A
NOTE
169

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
170

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DOA1, DOA0, and DOB7 to DOB0 are connected in connection unit
2 (COM32).
The common voltages for DOD7 to DOD4 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM34).
171

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number
Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DOA2 and DOE7 to DOE0 are connected in connection unit 2
(COM35).
The common voltages for DOA3 and DOF7 to DOF0 are connected in connection unit 2
(COM36).
172

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Connection unit 2
Bit number
Connector pin
number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A
NOTE
The common voltages for DOC7 to DOC0 and DOD3 to DOD0 are connected in connection
unit 2 (COM33).
173

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.4.6
External View of the
Connection Unit
174

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.5
CONNECTION OF
OPERATORS PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT
The operators panel connection unit (A16B22000660, 0661) is

connected to the Series 15B control unit through the FANUC I/O Link
and is used for interfacing with the machine operators panel.
The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 are
fully compatible with those for Series 15A. There are two units available
depending on the number of I/O points.
Specification
Input
Output
A16B22000660
96
64
A16B22000661
64
32

A16B22000660,0661
Series 15B control unit
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
To next device
or I/O unit
If there is no equipment beyond
this connection u nit, JD1A can
remain open.
DC24 V
BURNDY 3P
CP61
CM1
CONNECTOR
(Brown)
Housing:
SMS3PNS5
Contact:
RC16MSCT3
1
+24 V
GND
CM2
CM3
Machine
operators
panel
CM4
Power supply input specification

Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%
Capacity:500 + 7.3 n mA
n: number of inputs ON simultaneously
Grounding of the operators panel connection unit
Ground mounting plate.
175

MACHINE INTERFACE
6.5.1
B62073E/04
Input signals for the operators panel connection unit conform to a

noninsulation type interface. The input type is direct current input signal
A.
Input Signal
Regulations for the
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
(1) Direct current input signal A

Direct current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from the
machine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximity
switch.
requirements:
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mA
or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V or
less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(b) Fig. 6.5.1 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
Machine
CNC
Direct
current
input signal
Filter and level
conversion circuit
+24 V
Receiver circuit
Receiver
output
signal
Logical 1 when
the contact is
open
Logical 0 when
the contact is
closed
Fig. 6.5.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.5.1 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.
(Signal)
(Signal)
Logical 0
(18 V or more)

signal closeed
Logical 1
(6 V or less)
Open
Chattering of 5 ms
or less is ignoared
Receiver output signal
5 to 22 ms
5 to 22 ms
Fig. 6.5.1 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal
176

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.5.2
Output Signal
Regulations for the
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
The output signals from the operators panel connection unit are used for
driving lamps and light emitting diodes on the machine operators panel.
An NPN transistor is used as a driver. The output type is direct current
output signal B.
(1) Direct current output signal B
The direct current output signal B is used for driving relays and light
emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as
a driver.
(a) Ratings of the output transistor
(i) Maximum load current when output is ON: 200 mA (including
momentary load)
(ii)Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.6 V (maximum)/1.0 V
(normal) (when load current is 200 mA)
The maximum load current is limited to 1.3 A per common wire
(Note).
NOTE
Although a maximum load current of 200 mA is permitted
when the output is ON, the load current allowed to flow
through a common wire is limited to 1.3 A. Therefore, the
load current of the output transistor must satisfy the
following condition:
(N I)/Mt 1.3 A
Where N = Number of DO points that can be turned on
simultaneously
I = Load current that flows when output is ON
M =Number of common wires (one or two)
Example:When there are 64 DO points that can be turned on
simultaneously and two common wires are used, the rated load
current is 40 mA, calculated as shown below:
(64 I) / 2t 1.3 A
It 40 mA
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 24 V + 20% or less
including an instantaneous value
(iv) Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less
177

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(b) Output circuit
CNC
Machine
+
Relay
Regulated power
supply on the
machine
Transistor output circuit
(c) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the

machine, mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20
cm or less). When a capacitive load is connected to the machine,
insert a serial resistor for limiting the current so that the rated
current and voltage are ensured even for an instantaneous value.
(d) When the lamp is turned OFF, its resistance becomes extremely
low. So, when the lamp is turned on directly by transistor
output, surge current may flow and damage the transistor. For
this reason, add a protective circuit as shown below.
Lamp
CNC
Regulated
power
supply
Protective resistor
178

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.5.3
Connector Layout for
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
Address
Note) DI80 to DIB7 can be used only for the

A16B22000660.
NOTE
Address No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.
179

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Address
Note) DO40 to DO77 can be used only for the

A16B22000660.
NOTE
Address No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.
180

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.5.4
Details of the
Connection between
the Operators Panel
Connection Unit and
the Machine
Connector terminal number
Address number
Bit number
signal A
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number p.
181

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04

Address number
Bit number
signal A
NOTE
182

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04

Address number
Bit number
signal A
NOTE
183

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04

Address number
Bit number
signal A
NOTE
184

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Bit number
Address number
Example of connection
(*)

signal A
+24 V
regulated
power
supply
NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number q.
The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in the operators panel connection unit
(COM3).
+5 V output for supplying the power to the light emitting diode on the operators panel. The
output voltage is +5 VDC and the current is 300 mA. The power capacity is not enough to drive
the lamp. A separate regulated power supply is necessary for the lamp. The load capacity of
the output driver refer to 6.5.2.
185

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Bit number
Address number

signal A
+24 V
regulated
power
supply
NOTE
The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in
the operators panel connection unit (COM3).
186

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Bit number
Address number

signal A
+24 V
regulated
power
supply
NOTE
The common voltages for DO67 to DO70 are connected in
the operators panel connection unit (COM4).
187

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.5.5
External View of
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
Approx.
Fig. 6.5.5 External view of operators panel connection unit
The following LEDs and fuses are mounted on this printed circuit board.
[LEDs]
DB1 (GREEN PILOT): Lights when this PCB is ON.
DB2 (RED ALARM) : Lights when an error occurs on this PCB or
CNC.
[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A): For external 24 V input
FU2 (5.0 A): For +5 V power supply used on this PCB
Ordering specification A02B0163K111 (FU1/FU2 2fuse set)
188

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.6
CONNECTION OF
SOURCE OUTPUT
OPERATORS PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT
The source output operators panel connection unit (A16B22020730,

or 0731) is connected to Series 15B control units by the FANUC I/O
Link, and functions as the interface with the machine tool operators
panel.
Output from this connection unit is sourcetype. Input is sinktype
(24 V common). However, some connection units have DI that can be
switched to sourcetype input (0 V common).
Two connection units are available according to the number of I/Os.
Specification
Input
Output
A16B22020730
96
64
A16B22020731
64
32
Source output operators panel connection unit

A16B22020730,0731
Control unit series 15B
JD1A
JDIA
JD1B
To next device
or
If there is are no devices beyond this connection unit, JD1A may be left open.
I/O unit
DC24 V
CP61
CM51
Japan FCI 3pole Connector (brown)
CM52
Housing: SMS3PNS5
Contact: RC16MSCT3
CMB3
1
+24 V
GND
Machine
operators
panel
CMB4
Power supply input specification

Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%
Capacity: 500) 7.3 n (mA)
n: number of inputs ON simultaneously
Grounding of the operators panel connection unit
Ground mounting
plate
189

MACHINE INTERFACE
6.6.1
Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit Input
Signal Standard
B62073E/04
The input signal to the source output operators panel connection unit is
input over a noninsulated interface, and is called DC input signal A.
(1) DC input signal A
DC input signal A is sent to the NC from the machine tool by
pushbuttons, limit switches, relay contacts and proximity switches.
Most receivers are sink types. However, some inputs can be switched
to source type. (Use of sinktype receivers is required in safety
standards.)
(a) Satisfy the machineside contact conditions:
Contact capacitance: 30 VDC, 16 mA min.
Leak current between contacts in open circuit:
1 mA min. (voltage 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts in closed circuit:
2 V max. (including cable voltage drop)
(b) Input receiver circuit
Sinktype connection:
safety standard compliant
(24 V common)
Input signal
Filter and level

conversion circuit
R
+24 V
+24 V
Fig. 6.6.1 (a) Sinktype receiver circuit
190
Receiver
output
signal

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(c) Circuit of common switchable input receiver

Sinktype connection: safety standard

compliant (24 V common)
Input signal
Filter and level

conversion circuit
Contact
Receiver
output
signal
DICMN
+24 V
+24 V
0V
Sourcetype connection
(0 V common)
Input signal
Filter and level

conversion circuit
Contact
Receiver
output
signal
DICMN
+24 V
+24 V
0V
Fig. 6.6.1 (b) Common switchable receiver circuit
Figure 6.6.1 (c) below shows the signal timing standard.

(Signal)
(Signal)
Logic 1
(18 V or more)
DC input signal open
Logic 0
(6 V or less)
Closed
Chattering of 5 ms or
less is ignored.
Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms
5 to 22ms
Fig. 6.6.1 (c) Width and delay time of input signal
DC input signals are logic 1 when High, and logic 0 when Low.
191

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
Sinktype input signals are logic 0 when the contact is open, and logic
1 when closed.
Sourcetype input signals are logic 1 when the contact is open, and
logic 0 when closed.
NOTE
If the output signal line falls to ground when the input signal
is sourcetype (0 V common), the state is the same when
the contact is closed. For this reason, sourcetype input
signals are not recommended for ensuring safety.
By CEmarking compliancy, sinktype (+24 V common)
input signals are required.
6.6.2
Output Signal Standard
for Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
The output signal of the source output operators panel connection unit
is for driving lamps and LEDs on the machine tool operators panel. A
MOS FET is used as the driver.
(1) Direct current output signal
The DC output signal is used for driving relays and light emitting
diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as the driver.
(a) Output signal standard is as follows:
Maximum load current when output is ON:
200 mA (including momentary load)
Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V + 20% (including momentary load)
Leaking current when the output is OFF: 100 mA
Use the following power supply as the external power supply of the
output signal:
Power voltage:
+24 V" 10%
Power current:
Sum of maximum load current including

momentary current per board + 100 mA
min.
Power ON timing:
Same time as or before control unit
Power OFF timing:
Same time as or after control unit
NOTE
Connect the power supply that meets these specifications
to power terminals DOCOM and 0 V for the output signals.
The maximum current that is allowed to pass to each
DOCOM terminal pin is 2.0 A, and care must be paid to
prevent the sum of the load current from exceeding the
current that is allowed to pass via the DOCOM terminal.
192

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
(b) Output signal driver

Eight signals are output from each of the output signal driver
elements used on this operators panel connection unit.
The current of each output signal is monitored in the driver
element. When overcurrent is detected, output of that signal is
turned OFF. Once signal output is turned OFF due to overcurrent,
signal output is restored to ON as turning signal output OFF
eliminates the overcurrent state. For this reason, output is
repeatedly switched ON and OFF when the output signal falls to
ground or when it is in an overcurrent state. This also happens when
a large surge current load is connected.
The driver element also has an overheat detection circuit. When the
overcurrent state is continuous due to outputs having fallen to
ground and the temperature inside the element rises, output of all
eight signals is turned OFF and this OFF state is held. Output is
restored for each individual signal by temporarily setting output
logically OFF after the temperature inside the element has dropped.
Signal output can also be restored by powering OFF the system.
When the overheat detection circuit is activated on this printed
circuit board, the red LEDs mounted next to the driver element
light so that you can confirm activation of the overheat detection
circuit. (See Note.) When the overheat detection circuit is
activated, the CNC is notified of an alarm as a system alarm. (You
can also disable notification to the CNC system of this alarm by
closing (shorting) the short bar of setting pin CP1 mounted on this
printed circuit board. When notification is disabled, this alarm is
not treated as a system alarm.)
Correspondence between red LED and DO output signal
Red LED Name
DO Output Signal
DAL1
Y q+0.0 to Y q+0.7
DAL2
Y q+1.0 to Y q+1.7
DAL3
Y q+2.0 to Y q+2.7
DAL4
Y q+3.0 to Y q+3.7
DAL5
Y q+4.0 to Y q+4.7
DAL6
Y q+5.0 to Y q+5.7
DAL7
Y q+6.0 to Y q+6.7
DAL8
Y q+7.0 to Y q+7.7
Remarks
NOTE
Lighting of the red LEDs and transfer alarm to CNC function
are supported on printed circuit board 03B onwards.
193

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
If the CNC diagnoses that output does not turn ON even though it is ON,
a probable cause is that overloading of that output or other output in the
same element is causing the eight outputs of that element to stay OFF. If
this is the case, power the system OFF, and remove the cause of the
overload.
Driver device internal block diagram
DOCOM
OHD
IN#0
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
IN#1
CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
.
.
.
.
.
.
IN#7
CONTROL
LOGIC
.
.
.
.
.
.
OUT#7
OCD
OHD: Overheat detection circuit

OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power supply for operation of this driver device is DOCOM (24 VDC).
(c) Output signal precautions

The figure below shows the precautions when connecting output
signals. Parallel connection of output terminals shown like that
shown in this figure is prohibited.
DOCOM
+24 V 0 V
Relay
DV
DV
0V
194

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
NOTE
If the output signal falls to ground when the output signal is
sinktype (0 V common), the output signal stays ON. For
this reason, sinktype output signals are not recommended
for ensuring safety.
By CEmarking compliancy, sourcetype (+24 V common)
output signals are required.
6.6.3
ALARM LEDs on
Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
A16B22020730
A16B22020731
CP1
ALARM
DAL7
DAL8
DAL2
DAL3
DAL5
DAL1
DAL4
DAL6
ALARM out: Normal state

ALARM lit: Alarm state (communications with CNC suspended)
The source output operators manual connection unit is provided with a
function for detecting and outputting an alarm for excessive current
flowing to the output driver device caused by DO falling to ground.
When the above alarm is detected, the CNC outputs a system alarm, and
the LED corresponding to the DO where the alarm occurred lights. See
the following table for details on which LED lights.
You can also disable output of the output driver alarm as a CNC system
alarm by the onboard setting pin CP1.
If falling to ground of the DO causes excessive current to flow to the
output driver device.
195

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
DAL1
DAL2
DAL3
DAL4
DAL5
DAL6
DAL7
DAL8
out: Normal state

lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+0.0 to Yq+0.7
out: Normal state
out: Normal state
out: Normal state
out: Normal state
out: Normal state
out: Normal state
out: Normal state
System alarms generated by the above alarms are as follows.

For details, refer to Appendix C. 3 (3) (18) SLC ERROR of the FANUC
Series 15/150MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B62075).
SLCERROR aa(bb) Example SLC ERROR 03(41)
(aa: XXXXXX11
Binary bits 0 and 1 are 1. Other bits are not fixed.)
(bb: X1XXXXX1
Binary bit 6 is 1. Bits other than bit 0 to 4, and 6 are not fixed.)
The value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by bits 0
to 4 is the I/O group number where the error occurred.
The above example shows I/O alarms that have occurred in group O.
Setting pin CP1 settings are as follows:
Open: CNC is not notified of alarm.
Short: CNC is notified of alarm.
196

MACHINE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
6.6.4
(a) Connector pin assignment
Connector Pin
Assignment Addresses
of Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
CM51
CM52
DI00
33
DICMN1
DI60
33
0V
DI03
34
DI02
DI63
34
DI62
DI06
35
DI05
DI66
35
DI65
DI11
36
DI10
DI71
36
DI70
DI14
37
DI13
DI74
37
DI73
DI17
38
DI16
DI77
38
DI76
DI22
39
DI21
DI82
39
DI81
DI25
40
DI24
DI85
40
DI84
DI27
41
DI26
DI87
41
DI86
10
DI32
42
DI31
10
DI92
42
DI91
11
DI35
43
DI34
11
DI95
43
DI94
12
DI40
44
DI37
12
DIA0
13
DI43
45
DI42
13
DIA3
14
DI46
46
DI45
14
DIA6
15
DI51
47
DI50
15
DIB1
16
DI54
48
DI53
16
DIB4
17
DI56
49
DI55
17
18
+24 V
50
DI57
18
DO00
33
0V
DO03
34
DO02
DO06
35
DO05
36
DO10
DO61
37
DO13
DO64
38
DO16
DO67
39
DO21
DO72
40
DO24
DO75
41
DO26
DO56
42
DO31
0V
43
DO34
44
DO37
45
DO42
46
DO45
47
DO50
48
DO53
19
DI01
20
DI04
21
DI07
22
DI12
23
DI15
24
DI20
25
DI23
26
DI30
27
DI33
28
DI36
29
DI41
30
DI44
31
DI47
32
DI52
19
DI61
20
DI64
21
DI67
22
DI72
23
DI75
24
DI80
25
DI83
26
DI90
27
DI93
28
DI96
29
DIA1
30
DIA4
31
DIA7
32
DIB2
44
DI97
45
DIA2
46
DIA5
47
DIB0
48
DIB3
DIB6
49
DIB5
+24 V
50
DIB7
14
DO60
15
DO63
16
DO66
17
DO71
18
DO74
CMB3
19
DO01
20
DO04
21
DO07
22
DO12
23
DO15
24
DO20
25
DO23
26
DO30
27
DO33
28
DO36
29
DO41
30
DO44
31
DO47
32
DO52
DO11
DO14
DO17
DO22
DO25
DO27
10
DO32
11
DO35
12
DO40
13
DO43
14
DO46
15
DO51
16
DO54
17
DOCOM
49
DO55
18
DICMN2
50
DOCOM
CMB4
8
DO62
DO65
10
DO70
11
DO73
12
DO76
13
DO57
19
DO77
20
DOCOM
NOTE
Connector CNB4 is not mounted on this PCB when operators panel connection unit (DI/DO
64/32) is selected.
197
B62073E/04
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
208
B62073E/04
7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
7.1.1
(1) Standard
Outline
CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4
ON
COM
OFF
See 5.2
ON1
Shortcircuit
ON BUTTON
ON2
OFF1
OFF BUTTON
OFF2
CRT, PDP, LCD UNIT
CP2, CP3 or CP5
See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4
CN2
PDP POWER
CP11
CRT POWER
CP5
LCD POWER
MAIN CPU BOARD

JA1
See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4
CN1, JA1 VIDEO SIGNAL
SOFT KEY CABLE
KEYBOARD PCB
JA2
CK2
See 7.1.9 and 7.1.10
CK1
OPTION1 BOARD
(When the graphic
display function is used) JA1
Ground for protection.
209
B62073E/04
(2) Standard (When LCD/MDI unit with builtin graphic function is

used)
LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4
ON
COM
OFF
See 5.2
ON1
Shortcircuit
ON BUTTON
ON2
OFF1
OFF BUTTON
OFF2
LCD WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION
CP5
See 7.1.6
CP5 LCD POWER
MAIN CPU BOARD

JA1
See 7.1.6
JN1
JA2
SOFT KEY CABLE
See 7.1.9
KEYBOARD PCB
CNK2
CNK1
210
B62073E/04
(3) MMCII
CRT/MDI
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CP4
See 5.2
ON
OFF
COM
ON/OFF BUTTON
M4 TERMINAL
(14 horizontal CRT/MDI)
TAB#10
(14 vertical CRT/MDI)
CRT UNIT
See 7.1.2
CP2, CP3 or CP5
CN2 CRT POWER
MMCII GRAPHIC BOARD

See 7.1.2
JA1
CN1 VIDEO INPUT
KEYBOARD PCB
MAIN CPU BOARD
See 7.1.9
JA2
CNK1
NOTE
The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
211
B62073E/04
(4) MMCIII
CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4
See 5.2
ON
ON1
COM
Short
circuit
OFF
ON BUTTON
ON2
OFF1
OFF BUTTON
OFF2
CRT, PDP, LCD BUTTON
CP2, CP3 or CP5
See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3
CP11
CRT POWER
CP5
LCD POWER
MMCIII CPU board

JA1A
See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3
JA1 VIDEO INPUT
See 7.1.11
SOFT KEY CABLE
JA1B
KEYBOARD PCB
OPTION1 BOARD
CK2
JA1
CK1
MAIN CPU BOARD
JA2
See 7.1.9
NOTE
The MMCIII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
212
B62073E/04
(5) MMCIV
CRT/MDI, LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

CP4
See 5.2
ON
ON1
COM
Shortcircuit
OFF
ON BUTTON
ON2
OFF1
OFF BUTTON
OFF2
CRT UNIT
See 7.1.5
CP2, CP3 or CP5
CP11
CRT POWER
CP5
LCD POWER
MMCIV CPU BOARD

See 7.1.5
JA1A
JA1 VIDEO INPUT
See 7.1.9
SOFT KEY CABLE
JA1B
KEYBOARD PCU
MAIN CPU BOARD
See 7.1.9
JA2
CK2
CK1
OPTION 1 BOARD
JA1
NOTE
The MMCIV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.
213
B62073E/04
7.1.2
9 CRT or 9 PDP
Display Interface
(CE Marking
Noncompliant)
CNC
9 CRT/MDI or 9 PDP/MDI
JA1,JA1A
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HIROSE
FI40A20S (Connector)
FI20CV5 (Case)
VSYNC
(Note 1)
0V
HONDA
MR20FH (Connector)
MR20LFH (Case)
0V
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VDR
HSYNC
VSYNC
VDG
VDB
1
2
3
200A
200B
G
8
9
10
11
12
13
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HSYNC
or
CP2
or
CP3
CN1
(MR20RM)
200A
200B
G
Japan FCI
SMS3PN5 (housing)
RC16M23T3 (contact)
RC16MSCT3 (contact)
(Note 2)
(In case of 9 color or 9

monochrome PDP)

GND
214
CN2
(SMS3RK3TK2)
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 SIGNAL CABLE WIRING
11
12
18
16
12
14
10
VDR
VDR
0V
0V
VDG
VDG
0V
0V
VDB
VDB
0V
0V
HSYNC
HSYNC
0V
0V
VSYNC
VSYNC
0V
0V
Ground plate

A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable: Max. 50 m
NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
3 There is a set place for the adjustment in the back of the
PDP/MDI unit. Refer to 7.1.7 for the adjustment method.
215
B62073E/04
7.1.3
9 CRT or PDP Display
Interface (CE Marking
Compliant)
CNC
9 CRT PDP/MDI unit
JA1 (main CPU, option 1 board)

(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HIROSE
FI40A20A (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)
VSYNC
(Note 1)
0V
HONDA
MR20FH (connector)
MR20LFH (case)
0V
HSYNC
or
CP5
1
2
3
+24V
0V
1
2
3
(Note 2)
(In case of 9 monochrome CRT)
+24V
0V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VDR
HSYNC
VSYNC
VDG
VDB
8
9
10
11
12
13
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Japan FCI
SMS6PN5 (housing)
RC16M23T3 (contact)
RC16MSCT3 (contact)
AMP Japan 11781283(housing)

11752185 (contact)
CP5
CN1
(MR20RM)
Japan Crimped Terminal

VHR2N (housing)
SVH21T11 (contact)
(Note 2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
1
2
+24V
0V
(In case of 9 monochrome PDP)

GND
216
CN2
(SMS6RN4)
CN2
(B2PVH)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 Signal cable wiring
11
12
18
16
12
14
10
VDR
VDR
0V
0V
VDG
VDG
0V
0V
VDB
VDB
0V
0V
HSYNC
HSYNC
0V
0V
VSYNC
VSYNC
0V
0V
Ground plate

A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 50 m)
NOTE
2 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
217
B62073E/04
7.1.4
14 Analog CRT, 10.4
LCD, 9.5 LCD Display
Compliant when
MMCIV is not Used)
14 CRT/MDI unit
10.4 LCD/MDI unit
9.5 LCD/MDI unit
CNC
JA1 (option 1 board)
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
CP2 or CP3
(AMP)
CP5
(AMP)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HIROSE
FI40A20S (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)
VSYNC
(Note 1)
0V
0V
HSYNC
AMP Japan
11781283(housing)
11752185 (contact)
1
2
3
200A
200B
G
1
2
3
+24V
0V
(Note 2)
In case of 14 CRT
(Note 3)
In case of LCD
JA1
(PCRE20LMD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
1
2
3
200A
200B
G
CP11
(AMP)
1
2
3
+24V
0V
CP5
(AMP)
AMP Japan
117828883(housing)
11752185 (contact)
GND
218
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC
B62073E/04
NOTE
18
18
16
16
12
12
14
14
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
Ground plate

NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
cable.
219
B62073E/04
7.1.5
14 Analog CRT, 10.4
LCD, 9.5 LCD Display
Compliant when
MMCIV is Used)
14 CRT/MDI unit
10.4 LCD/MDI unit
9.5 LCD/MDI unit
CNC
JA1A (MMCIV board)
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
CP2 or CP3
(AMP)
CP5
(AMP)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HIROSE
FI20CV5 (case)
VSYNC
(Note 1)
0V
0V
HSYNC
AMP Japan
11781283(housing)
11752185 (contact)
1
2
3
200A
200B
G
1
2
3
+24V
0V
(Note 2)
In case of 14 CRT
(Note 3)
In case of LCD
JA1
(PCRE20LMD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
1
2
3
200A
200B
G
CP11
(AMP)
1
2
3
+24V
0V
CP5
(AMP)
AMP Japan
21782883(housing)
11752185 (contact)
GND
220
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC
B62073E/04
NOTE
18
18
16
16
12
12
14
14
VDR
VDR
0V
0V
VDG
VDG
0V
0V
VDB
VDB
0V
0V
HSYNC
HSYNC
0V
0V
VSYNC
VSYNC
0V
0V
Ground plate

NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the po
wer cable.
cable.
4 The MMCIV board cannot be used on the
221
B62073E/04
7.1.6
10.4 LCD Display
Compliant with Builtin
Graphic Function)
10.4 LCD/MDI unit
CNC
JA1 (main CPU board)
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
RXD
0V
0V
*RXD
0V
CP5
(AMP)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
HIROSE
FI20CV5 (case)
TXD
(Note 1)
0V
0V
*TXD
+24V
0V
(Note 2)
JN1
(PCRE20LMD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
TXD
0V
0V
*TXD
0V
+24V
0V
AMP Japan
21782883(housing)
11752185 (contact)
GND
222
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
RXD
0V
0V
*RXD
CP5
(AMP)
B62073E/04
NOTE
RXD
TXD
0V
0V
18
18
16
16
12
12
14
14
0V
0V
*RXD
*TXD
0V
0V
*TXD
*RXD
0V
0V
TXD
RXD
0V
0V
Ground plate

NOTE
cable.
223
B62073E/04
7.1.7
(1) Overview
Adjusting the Flat

Display
A color liquid crystal display (LCD) and plasma display (PDP) require
settings for finely adjusting the video signal.
These settings are necessary because the signal slightly varies depending
on the NC unit or cables.
How to do the settings is described below.
Do the adjustment if the hardware of the display circuit on the NC, the
display unit, or a cable is replaced during installation or when a problem
occurs.
(2) Points to be adjusted
SW1
Color liquid crystal

display (rear side)
TM1
Power
supply
SW1 TM1
Plasma display (rear side)
(3) How to do the adjustments

(a) Adjusting any flickering
1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting pin TM1
2 Plasma display: Setting switch TM1
1) Change the setting to find a range in which there is no flickering.
2) If there are several settings without flickering, select the middle
one.
(Example) When there is no flickering in settings 2 to 6, select
setting 4.
(b) Setting the horizontal position
1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting switch SW1
2 Plasma display: Setting switch SW1
1) The horizontal position can be adjusted in units of dots.
2) Set the switch so that the entire screen is displayed. There is only
one such position. Normally, it is not necessary to change the
factory setting.
(4) Others
Do not change settings other than above such as volumes.
NOTE
The brightness of the LCD display drops in low ambient
temperatures. (The LCD screen is dark immediately after
the power is turned ON.) This is due to the characteristics
of the LCD, and is not a malfunction. The LCD screen
becomes brighter when the ambient temperature rises.
224
B62073E/04
7.1.8
Interface between
MMCIV Board and
Option 1 Board
(Video Signal)
MMCIV board
Option 1 board
JA1A
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HIROSE
FI20CV5 (case)
JA1
(PCRE20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC
Signal cable wiring
18
18
16
16
12
12
14
14
VDR
VDR
0V
0V
VDG
VDG
0V
0V
VDB
VDB
0V
0V
HSYNC
HSYNC
0V
0V
VSYNC
VSYNC
0V
0V

A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 40 cm)
NOTE
The MMCIV board cannot be
225
used
on
the
7.1.9
The keyboard interface specification is common to all MDI units exccept

9 keyboard interface.
Keyboard Interface
CNC (LCD)
B62073E/04
(Note 1)
CRT/MDI UNIT (MDI)
JA2
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CNK1
(PCRE20MD)
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11
NOTE
1 The parenthesized modes
apply to the 10.4 LCD/MDI
unit with the internal graphics
function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11
Cable wiring
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
*COM11
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
Cable length: Up to 50 m
226
*KEY00
B62073E/04
7.1.10
Small 9 Keyboard
Interface
CNC
CRT/MDI UNIT
JA2
(PCREV20MDT)
CA9
(MR20RFD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11
*COM11
*COM00
*COM01
*KEY06
*KEY04
*KEY02
*KEY00
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
*COM02
*COM03
*KEY07
*KEY05
*KEY03
*KEY01
*COM04
*COM05
*COM06
*COM07
*COM08
*COM09
*COM10
Cable wiring
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
14
16
18
10
20
11
13
12
12
13
11
14
10
15
16
17
15
18
17
19
19
20
*COM11
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
Cable length: Up to 50 m
227
*KEY00
B62073E/04
7.1.11
Interface between
MMCIII Board and
Option 1 Board
(Video Signal)
CNC MMCIII CPU board
CNC option 1 board
JA1
(PCREV20MDT)
JA1
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
11
VDR
2
12 VSYNC
0V
3
13
VDG
4
14
0V
0V
5
15
VDB
6
16
0V
0V
7
17
8
18 HSYNC
(DTC)
9
19
10
20
Signals with marked ( ) is not used.
VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC
Cable wiring
18
18
16
16
12
12
14
14
VDR
VDR
0V
0V
VDG
VDG
0V
0V
VDB
VDB
0V
0V
HSYNC
HSYNC
0V
0V
VSYNC
VSYNC
0V
0V
Ground plate

A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable
NOTE
The MMCIII board cannot be
228
used
on
the
B62073E/04
7.2
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE
7.2.1
RS232C Serial Port
RELAYING CONNECTOR
Cable wiring
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
NOTE
For +24 V and SG, determine the wire thickness and the number of wires so that the conductor
resistance is 0.33 W or less.
229
B62073E/04
7.2.2
PPR Connection
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
Relaying connector
Connector: DBM25S (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418J2 (Japan Aviation
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM25P (Japan Aviation
Lock metal: DBC2J9 (Japan Aviation
Relayingcable
Accessory for PPR
Input power supply

AC85 to 125 V
50/60 Hz " 3 Hz 0.2 KVA
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
4 When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface
(baud rate is 4800 baud).
230
B62073E/04
7.2.3
Portable Tape Reader
Connection
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
Relaying connector
Portable tape
reader
Relayingcable
Accessory for
portable tape reader
Cable side plug

WF7013 (Matsushita Denko)
Input power supply

AC200 to 240 V (+10%, 15%)
50/60 Hz " 1 Hz 110 VA (Without reel)
130 VA (With reel)
Plug receptable
WF3012E (Matsushita Denko)
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
4 When connecting the portable tape reader, set the corresponding parameter to use reader
puncher interface (baud rate is 4800 baud).
231
B62073E/04
7.2.4
FANUC Cassette
Connection
Relaying
cable
Accessory for cassette

Relaying connector
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface when connecting FANUC cassette.
The standard baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter (an external disk drive) and FANUC Handy File (an I/O
unit) at the same time. If they are connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A,
JD5B, and JD5J, the power capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity
exceeds that of +24 V, the operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)
232
B62073E/04
7.2.5
Connection with the
FANUC Handy File
Relaying
cable
Accessory for cassette

Relaying connector
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT
NOTE
1 The machine tool builder must provide the relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Ordering code of recommended cable: A66L00010041
3 Open all terminals other than those illustrated.
4 Set the parameter enabling the reader/punch interface to be used when connecting a FANUC
Handy File. The standard baud rate is 4800 bauds.
5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter FANUC Handy File at the same time. If they are
connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A, JD5B, and JD5J, the power
capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity exceeds that of +24 V, the
operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)
233
B62073E/04
7.2.6
Connection of Tape
Reader Without Reels
Tape reader
DB25ST (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.
Connector: DB25P
Locking: D110278
(Japan Aviation
M3 screw terminal
NIHON AMP
11781283 (housing)
11752185 (contact)
Connect signal cables as shown below.

Control unit
Tape reader
Use cable lamp
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
3 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC
voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the power
supply for the tape reader.
234
B62073E/04
7.2.7
Connection of Tape
Reader with Reels
Tape reader
BurndyJapan
SMS3PK5
NIHON AMP
11781283
Connect signal cables as shown below.

Tape reader
Control unit
Use cable lamp
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
3 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC
voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the power
supply for the tape reader.
235
B62073E/04
7.2.8
RS422 Serial Port
Host computer (example)
CNC subboard
+24 V is not used.
(1) Conceptual diagram for signal connection

The following is a conceptual diagram showing the connection of the
signals between the CNC and host.
Actually, each signal other than FG and SG requires two lines because
the signals are transmitted in differential signal transmission in the
RS422 standard.
CNC
Output
Input
Host
236
B62073E/04
(2) Example of actual connection of RS422 cables
(Note 2)
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
1 Use twistedpair cables.
2 Note that the pin position for the *DM signal is irregular on the CNC side (to prevent erroneous
connection).
237
B62073E/04
7.3
MANUAL PULSE
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
MPG
MPG UNIT #1
(M3 screw terminal)
MPG UNIT #2
(M3 screw terminal)
MPG UNIT #3
(M3 screw terminal)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)
FOR Lv 20 m
238
B62073E/04
(1) Cable connection for the manual pulse generator

The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance
from causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2 V (total for both
the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.1: 0.1 A power supply current of the
0.2 u+ 0.1 R 2L
m
manual pulse generator
R: Resistance per unit length of the
This can be converted to the
wire (W/m)
following equation:
m: Number of wires connected in
L t+ m
each 0 V and 5 V line
R
L: Wire length (m)
When A66L00010286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the FS15B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When three wires of this cable are used for 0
V and another three for 5 V, the allowable cable length is calculated
as follows:
3 + 76.75 [m]
L t+
0.0394
This means that a power supply with a cable length of 50 m is still
within specifications.
239
B62073E/04
7.4
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE
(RS232C)
CNC OPTION1 Board
Conceptional diagram of signal connection

CNC side
Output
Input
Host side
240
B62073E/04
Example of cabling
Shield
Ground plate
Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or

expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.
241
B62073E/04
7.5
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE (RS422)
CNC OPTION1 Board
(+24 V) is not used.
(1) Conceptional diagram of signal connection

The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a host
computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential
signal transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those
signals.
CNC side
Output
Input
Host side
242
B62073E/04
(2) Actual example of RS422 signal wiring
(Note 2)
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side is positioned irregularly relative
to the other signals. This is to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this connector is
erroneously connected to the connector on the other side.
243
7.6
B62073E/04
Connection for highspeed skip signals is as follows:
HIGHSPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE
244
B62073E/04
Cable connection
Shield
Ground plate
Shield
Ground plate
Description
Highspeed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP4) or
highspeed measured positionreached signals
(HEA1 to HEA3)
15M
15T
HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1

HDI3 = HSKP4
Highspeed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP3) or
highspeed measured positionreached signals
(HEA1 to HEA3)
HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1 on tool post 1
151T

NOTE
Unused pins of the connectors must be left open.
245
B62073E/04
Highspeed DI Signal Receiver Input Signal Standard

Circuit configuration
Driver
NC
Receiver
VH/VL
Iih/Iil
Shield
Absolute maximum rating

Input voltage range Vin: 3.6 V to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Item
Symbol
Standard
Unit
Highlevel input voltage
VH
3.6 to 11.6
Lowlevel input voltage
VL
0 to 1.0
0.5 max.
mA
High level input current

Highlevel
Iih
Vin=5 V
9.3 max.
mA
Vin=10 V
8.0 max.
mA
Vin=0 V
Lowlevel input current
Iil
Description
NOTE
1 Symbols lih and lil shows the signal flow direction, + signals
flow into the receiver, and signals flow out of the receiver.
2 When the input voltage is low level, highspeed skip signals
are regarded as logic 1, and when the input voltage is high
level, the signals are regarded as logic 0.
246
B62073E/04
7.7
CONNECTION OF
REFERENCE
POSITION
APPROACH SIGNAL
Connect the reference position approach signal as shown below. This

signal is used when using the grid method (only for CNCs for multiaxis
machines).
For information regarding connections and sequences for reference
position return, refer to the BMI Interface Connection Manual. The
following text describes only the connection of the reference position
approach signal.
CNC (Additional cabinet)
Cable wiring
Shield
Ground plate
Signal name
Description
NZ1
1staxis reference position approach signal
NZ2
2ndaxis reference position approach signal
NZ3
3rdaxis reference position approach signal
NZ4
4thaxis reference position approach signal
NZ1
NZ2
NZ3
NZ4
Axis CPU1
Axis CPU2
247
B62073E/04
7.8
DNC INTERFACE
7.8.1
DNC1 Interface
a. Multipoint connection
CNC OPTION1 board
Tap
JD6A
(PCREV20MDT)
1
TRD1(+)
11
TRD2(+)
TRD2(+)
TRD1()
12
TRD2()
TRD2()
13
14
15
16
17
SG
14
15
9
10
TRD1(+)
11
TRD1()
12
SG
16
17
18
19
13
20
18
19
10
20
Cable connection
1
10
11
11
12
TRD1 (+)
TRD1 (+)
TRD1 ()
TRD1 ()
TRD2 (+)
TRD2 (+)
TRD2 ()
TRD2 ()
SG
SG
PCR connector
248
MR connector
(MR20 female)
B62073E/04
b. 11 connection
CNC OPTION1 board
Tap
JD6A
(PCREV20MDT)
1
RD
11
SD
SD
*RD
12
*SD
*SD
RT
13
TT
TR
*RT
14
*TT
*TR
CS
15
RS
RS
*CS
16
*RS
*RS
DM
17
TR
SG
SG
18
*TR
*DM
19
10
TT
*TT
10
RD
11
*RD
12
DM
13
*DM
14
CS
15
*CS
16
17
18
RT
19
*RT
20
20
Cable connection
11
12
10
11
13
14
18
19
15
16
14
15
12
13
17
18
SD
SD
*SD
*SD
RD
RD
*RD
*RD
TT
TT
*TT
*TT
RT
RT
*RT
*RT
RS
RS
*RS
*RS
CS
CS
*CS
*CS
DM
DM
*DM
*DM
TR
TR
*TR
*TR
SG
SG
Twisted shielded cable
0.3 mm2 wire or thicker
HONDA Tsushin MR20 (female)
249
B62073E/04
7.8.2
DNC2 Interface
(RS232C)
CNC OPTION1 board
JD5C
(PCREV20MDT)
DBM25S
RD
11
SD
FG
0V
12
0V
SD
DR
13
ER
RD
0V
14
0V
RS
CS
15
RS
CS
0V
16
0V
DR
CO
17
SG
0V
18
CD
9
10
19
(+24V)
(+24V)
20
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ER
21
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptual diagram of
signal connection
CNC
Output
Input
Host
0V
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
SG
SG
FG
FG
FRAME
When CS is not used, short with RS.

When DR is not used, short with ER.
CD must be shorted with ER at all times.
NOTE
When an IBM PCAT is used, RS becomes low in the
reception phase. When this happens, short CS on the host
with ER on the host.
250
B62073E/04
7.8.3
DNC2 Interface
(RS422)
CNC OPTION1 board
JD6A
(PCREV20MDT)
FG
21
RD
11
SD
*RD
12
*SD
RT
13
TT
*RT
14
*TT
RD
CS
15
RS
RS
*CS
16
*RS
RT
DM
17
TR
CS
0V
18
*TR
10
*DM
19
(+24V)
11
DM
10
(+24V)
20
12
TR
SD
13
TT
18
SG
Conceptual diagram of
signal connection
CNC
Output
Input
Host
0V
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
TR
TR
DM
DM
TT
TT
RT
RT
SG
SG
FG
FG
FRAME
251
24
*RD
25
*RS
26
*RT
27
*CS
28
29
*DM
30
*TR
31
34
16
19
*SD
23
33
15
17
22
32
14
(+24 V) is not used.
20
35
36
37
*TT
7.9
SPINDLE INTERFACE
B62073E/04
The following two configurations of the spindle interface are available in

Series 15B.
(1) Series Serial spindle
P/C
1st spindle
Serial
SPDL1 (JA7A)
JA7B
spindle
JA7A
amplifier
Motor
Main CPU
board
P/C
2nd spindle
Serial
JA7B
spindle
JA7A
amplifier
Motor
(2) Analog spindle
Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)

SPDL1 (JA7A)
P/C
Analog signal
AOUT1 (JA8A)
SPDL2 (JA7B)
1st spindle
Analog spindle
amplifier
Motor
Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)

P/C
AOUT2 (JA8B)
Analog signal
Analog spindle
amplifier
2nd spindle
Motor
The position coder return signal for the 1st spindle is connected to
connector JA7A used for connecting the serial spindle described in (1)
above.
NOTE
Only the 1st analog spindle can be connected for the Series
15MB and 15TB. The 1st and 2nd analog spindles can
be connected only for Series 15TTB.
252
B62073E/04
Spindle Motor Safety Measure

To ensure a high degree of safety in the event of a malfunction, adopt a
safety measure such as that shown below capable of stopping spindle
rotation if a speed higher than the specified spindle speed is detected.
WARNING
CNC
Spindle speed
detection
Actual spindle speed

signal
AR0 to AR15
PMC
Greater
than
specified
value?
P/C
Spindle amplifier
Spindle
SP motor
MCC
200 VAC input
Example of safety circuit when analog spindle I/F interface is used
The speed of rotation input to the CNC from the position coder is read by
the PMC. If this speed of rotation exceeds the preset spindle speed, the
MCC for the spindle amplifier is shut OFF by the PMC.
253
7.9.1
Serial Spindle Interface
(S Series Spindle)
B62073E/04
Connect to the spindle amplifier, using optical fiber cable equipped with
an optical I/O link adaptor.
I/O LINK ADAPTER

Spindle
amplifier
Up to 2 m
Optical
fiber
cable
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
254
B62073E/04
See section 6.2.2 for adapter and optical fiber cable specifications.
Pay attention to the following points when you are using the panel internal
wiring type without reinforced covering (A66L60010008).
D
D
D
Do not to bend optical fiber cable to less than a radius of 15 mm.

Do not unnecessarily twist optical fiber cable.
When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow the
outer covering of the cable to be deformed. (Do not tug on nylon bands.
Tugging on nylon bands applies unnecessary force on the optical fiber
cable.)
When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow
bending force to be applied partially.
7.9.2
Serial Spindle Interface
( Series)
CNC
series spindle amplifier module
JA7A (main CPU board)

(PCREV20MDT)
JA7B
(PCREV20MDT)
SIN
11
*SIN
12
SOUT
13
*SOUT
14
15
16
17
8
9
18
(+5V)
10
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
SIN
11
0V
*SIN
12
0V
SOUT
13
0V
*SOUT
14
0V
15
0V
16
0V
17
19
20
9
(+5V)
18
(+5V)
10
20
JA7B
JA7A
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
0V
0V
0V
(+5V)
series spindle amplifier module
CNC
SOUT
(+5V)
19
12
12
14
14
16
16
Shield
255
Ground plate
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
0V
0V
0V
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010248#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs)
2 When this cable is wired closely to power cables or other cables, shielded leads must be
grounded to the grounding plate. This is unnecessary when the CNC is mounted close to the
spindle amplifier module.
3 When the CNC and spindle amplifier module are located in the same magnetics box or
magnetics box welded together, connection by electrical signal leads from this case is
necessary. When the CNC and spindle motor are mounted separately in two or more
magnetics boxes that are not welded together, they must be connected by optical fiber cable
using the optical I/O link adapter.
4 The +5 V terminal is for optical link transfer via the optical I/O link adapter. When connecting
by a metal cable such as this cable, leave the +5 V terminal unconnected. When the +5 V
terminal is connected by mistake, short both the +5 V terminals on the NC unit and the spindle
modular.
7.9.3
Analog Spindle
Interface
Signal name
Description
SVC, ES
Spindle command voltage and common

line
ENB1, ENB2
Spindle enable signal (Note 1)
CLKX0, CLKX1
FSX0, FSX1
DX0, DX1
" 15 V, ) 5 V, 0 V
Feed axis check signal (Note 2)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate
256
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 ENB1 and 2 turn on when a spindle command voltage is effective. These signals are not used
when the FANUC Spindle Servo Unit is used.
2 Feed axis check signal is used when a feed axis is checked or service work is done. This signal
is not used for spindle control.
7.9.4
Pulse Coder Interface
Signal name
Description
SC, *SC
Pulse coder Cphase signal
PA, *PA
Pulse coder Aphase signal
PB, *PB
Pulse coder Bphase signal
SOUT, *SOUT
Signal for serial spindle (Note 1)
POSITION CODER
Shield
Earthplate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG6+#24AWG3) max length 20 m.
257
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 Signals SPOUT and *SPOUT are for a serial spindle. These
signals are not used for an analog spindle.
2 When the line length is over 14 m, set the maximum
electrical resistance of 0 V and 5 V to 0.5 W.
The position coder, which generates square waveform voltage signals of

the number proportionate to the angle of rotation of the spindle, is used
for perrevolution feed and for thread cutting. The spindle and the
position coder are connected in the following four ways by parameter
setting (parameter 5610).
(1) One revolution of the position coder for one revolution of the spindle.
(2) One revolution of the position coder for two revolution of the spindle.
(3) One revolution of the position coder for four revolution of the spindle.
(4) One revolution of the position coder for eight revolution of the spindle.
Fig. 7.9.4 shows the timing chart of signals generated from the position
coder.
PA
1024 pulse/revolution
PB
1024 pulse/revolution
SC
1 pulse/revolution
Fig. 7.9.4 Waveform generated by position coder
NOTE
A differential driver is used for feedback from the position
coder.
*PA, *PB, and *SC are the inverted signals of PA, PB, and
SC respectively and vice sersa.
258
B62073E/04
7.10
SERVO INTERFACE
7.10.1
The servo interface of the Series 15B has these features.
Outline
Digital control AC servo motor

Motor feedback : Serial pulse coder
1) 10,000 pulse/rev incremental pulse coder
2) 1,000,000 pulse/rev absolute pulse coder
Scale feedback : A/B/Z signal interface
SEPARATE TYPE
DISCHARGE UNIT
T2 T4
MAIN CPU BOARD

OPTION2 BOARD
AC 200 V
T1
JVn
JFn
JA4A, JA4B
AC 100 V
CN1
200 VAC INPUT
DIGITAL SERVO
AMPLIFIER
MS3106B2214S
+6 V BATTERY UNIT
FOR ABSOLUTE
PULSE CODER
JF2n
LINEAR SCALE
n=AXIS NUMBER
(1, 2, .. 8)
For details, refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR

DESCRIPTIONS (B65002E)
259
B62073E/04
(1) For the series servo amplifier
7.10.2
Servo Amp Interface
JV1 to JV8
(PCREV20MDT)
n: Axis number
(1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
260
B62073E/04
(2) For the Sseries servo amplifier
JV1 to JV8
(PCREV20MDT)
n: Axis number (1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
261
B62073E/04
(3) For the Cseries servo amplifier
JV1 to JV8
(PCREV20MDT)
n: Axis number
(1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
262
B62073E/04
7.10.3
(1) For the serial pulse coder A, B
Serial Pulse Coder

Interface
SERVO MOTOR
JF1 to JF8
(PCREV20MDT)
PULSE CODER
CABLE WIRING
Shield
SHLD (shield)
Ground plate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)
263
B62073E/04
(2) For the serial pulse coder C (model 0S or more)
SERVO MOTOR
JF1 to JF8
(PCREV20MDT)
PULSE CODER
MS3106B2029SW(straight)
MS3108B2029SW (elbow)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
SHLD (shield)
Ground plate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)
264
B62073E/04
(3) For the model 40S to 00SP (common for incremental and absolute)
SERVO MOTOR
PULSE CODER
JF1 to JF8
(PCREV20MDT)
Connector HDAB15S
Connector cover HDAW15CV (20SP to 00SP)
Connector cover HDACTH (40S, 30S)
CABLE WIRING
Shield
SHLD (shield)
Ground plate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)
265
B62073E/04
(1) Cable connection for the incremental pulse coder

Series 15B employ a serial pulse coder for which the power supply
is 5 VDC, same as used by the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary
to suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or
less (total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.5 u+ R 2L
m
wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each
0 V and 5 V line
following equation:
L: Wire length (m)
L t+ m
4R
(a) When A66L00010286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the Series 15B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cable
length is calculated as follows:
3
+ 19 [m]
L t+
4 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
Series 15B/16/18 and 18 connector. However it cannot be extended
up to 50 m.
(b) When A66L00010157 cable is used:
This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B61393)
for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line
wires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
3
+ 46.87 [m]
L t+
4 0.016
This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.
However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely
into f cable clamp for Series 15B cable.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal
block or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce
the diameter so that it fits into the connector.
Example 1)
For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications
Pulse corder
Terminal
block
266
B62073E/04
Example 2)
Pulse corder
Enlarged figure
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with

a heat shrinkable tube
(2) Cable connection for the absolute pulse coder

Series 15B employ the serial pulse coder, for which the power supply
5 VDC, same as for the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary to
suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or less
(total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.5 u+ R
2L
m

following equation:

wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each
0 V and 5 V line
L: Wire length (m)
m
4R
(a) When A66L00010286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the Series 15B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cable
length is calculated as follows:
L t+
3
+ 19 [m]
4 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
connector for Series 16 and 18 but cannot be extended up to 50 m.
L t+
(b) When A66L00010157 cable is used:

This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B61393)
for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line
wires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
L t+
3
+ 46.87 [m]
0.016
This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.

However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely into
the cable clamp for Series 15B.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block or
peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the diameter
so that it fits into the connector.
267
B62073E/04
Example 1)
For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications
Pulse corder
Terminal
block
Example 2)
Pulse corder
Enlarged figure
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube
268
B62073E/04
7.10.4
Linear Scale Interface
(A/B/Z Signal Interface)
LINEAR SCALE
JF21 to JF28
(PCREV20MDT)
+6 V and REQ are for separate absolute pulse coders.
CABLE WIRING
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24WG 3pair)
269
B62073E/04
Input Signal Standard

The standard for the feedback signal from the linear scale is as follows.
(1) A, B phase signal input
The position of the linear scale is detected by inputting position
information by the A and B phase signals whose phases are mutually
displayed by 90. The B phase signal ahead of the A phase signal is
interpreted as a movement of the linear scale in the plus direction,
while the A phase signal ahead of the B phase signal is interpreted as
a movement of the linear scale in the minus direction.
Move to + direction
A phase signal
B phase signal
Move to direction
A phase signal
B phase signal
(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat cycle Tdy 0.15 msec (0.21 msec
when servo software 906X is used)
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td
Td
Td
Td
Tp
(3) Z phase signal input

A signal width of 1/4 cycle or more of the A and B phase signals is
required for Z phase signal input (single rotation signal).
Z phase signal
Tw
Twy 1/4 cycle of A phase or B phase
270
B62073E/04
7.10.5
Linear Scale Interface
(Serial Interface)
CNC
Linear scale (serial interface)
JF21 to JF28
(PCREV20MDT)
1
SD
11
*SD
12
13
14
REQ
15
*REQ
16
(+6V)
17
8
9
10
18
+5V
0V
0V
0V
+6 V is for separate absolute pulse coders.
+5V
19
20
+5V
CABLE WIRING
SD
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V
SD
*SD
REQ
*REQ
+5V
18
+5V
20
+5V
12
0V
14
0V
16
0V
Shield
Ground plate

A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pairs)
271
B62073E/04
7.10.6
APC Battery Interface
Batterycase
CABLE WIRING
Batterycase

y 0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
NOTE
The service life of the APC battery is about one year per
fourcell battery case when used for backup of six axes
(serial pulse coder A).
272
B62073E/04
7.10.7
The hybrid control system requires an auxiliary position detecting device

in addition to the position detector used in conventional servo systems.
This auxiliary position detecting device is called the separate detector.
For hybrid control, the pulse detector can be used as the separate detector
(linear scale such as an optical scale or Magnescale). The separate
detector connectors (JF21 to JF28) of the CNC are the same as those of
the linear scale interface (see 7.10.4).
Hybridcontrol
Connections
CNC
Linear scale
Position
command
JVn
Digital
servo
amp.
Hybride
control
AC
servo
motor
Build in
pulse
coder
JFn
JF2n
n: Axis number = 1, 2, 3 ...
273
B62073E/04
7.11
GENERALPURPOSE
ANALOG VOLTAGE
INPUT INTERFACE
CNC
Analog voltage input range: 10 V to +10 V

Input current: " 0.5 mA max.
JA6
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
AIN0
0V
AIN2
0V
(0V)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AIN1
0V
AIN3
0V
(0V)
NOTE
Signals enclosed in parentheses cannot be used.
Unused pins must be left open.
Connect the signal cables as follows:
Control unit
+5V
R R
AIN0 1
0V 2
R
LM1
0M1
+5V
R
2nd analog spindle unit
R AIN1 11
R
0V 12
+5V
R
1st analog spindle unit
R AIN2 3
0V 4
1st general
purpose analog
input signal
+5V
R
R AIN3 13
R
0V 14
2nd general
purpose analog
input signal
Clamp the cables

with a cable clamp.
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:

A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
274
B62073E/04
7.12
CONNECTION
BETWEEN THE
SERIES 15B
(MMCII) AND
PERIPHERAL UNITS
Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD5A to JD5B: PCR20
Punch panel (RS232C)

CD6A to CD6B: DBM25S
JD5A
to
JD5B
JD6
(Note 3)
CD6A
to
CD6B
NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connection with the punch panel (connector for an extension
cable). For connection with external devices, prepare cables for direct connection, if necessary.
2 The +24 V terminal in the above diagram is used exclusively for the FANUC I/O devices. Do
not use it for other purposes.
When a FANUC I/O device that utilizes +24 V is connected to Series 15B, do not connect more
than one device at one time due to the limitation of the power supply.
3 For the MMC CPU (A02B0120J201), which requires two RS232C channels and one
RS422 channel, JD6 is used as an RS422 port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS232C
interface.
275
B62073E/04
Punch panel
MMCII MAIN CPU
(RS232C)
JD5A to JD5B 11
SD
JD5A to JD5B 12
0V
JD5A to JD5B 01
RD
JD5A to JD5B 02
0V
JD5A to JD5B 15
RS
JD5A to JD5B 16
0V
JD5A to JD5B 05
CS
JD5A to JD5B 06
0V
JD5A to JD5B 03
DR
JD5A to JD5B 04
0V
JD5A to JD5B 07
CD
JD5A to JD5B 08
0V
JD5A to JD5B 13
ER
JD5A to JD5B 14
0V
JD5A to JD5B 10
JD5A to JD5B 19
SD
CD6A to CD6B 02
RD
CD6A to CD6B 03
RS
CD6A to CD6B 04
CS
CD6A to CD6B 05
DR
CD6A to CD6B 06
CD
CD6A to CD6B 08
ER
CD6A to CD6B 20
SG
CD6A to CD6B 07
+24V
CD6A to CD6B 25
+24V
+24V
FG
CD6A to CD6B 01
NOTE
1 The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L00010284#10P
276
B62073E/04
7.13
CONNECTION WITH
AN EXTERNAL
DEVICE USING THE
RS422 INTERFACE
FOR SERIES 15B
(MMCII)
Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD6: PCR20
External device (RS422)
NOTE
1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be
actually used shall be designed according to the interface for external device.
2 Do not connect anything to the (+24 V) terminal.
3 For the MMCII CPU (A02B0120J202), which requires three RS232C channels, JD6 is
used as an RS232C port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS422 interface.
277
B62073E/04
I/O (RS422)
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD6 11
SD
RD
06
JD6 12
*SD
*RD
24
JD6 01
RD
SD
04
JD6 02
*RD
*SD
22
JD6 15
RS
CS
09
JD6 16
*RS
*CS
27
JD6 05
CS
RS
07
JD6 06
*CS
*RS
25
JD6 07
DR
ER
12
JD6 09
*DR
*ER
30
JD6 17
ER
DR
11
JD6 18
*ER
*DR
29
JD6 13
TT
RT
08
JD6 14
*TT
*RT
26
JD6 03
RT
TT
17
JD6 04
*RT
*TT
35
JD6 08
0V
SG
19
JD6 10
(+24V)
JD6 19
(+24V)
FG
01
NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.
Connect the units in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable
clamp.
278
B62073E/04
7.14
CONNECTION WITH
A PRINTER USING
THE CENTRONICS
INTERFACE FOR
FANUC SERIES 15B
(MMCII)
Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD9: PCR20
Printer (Centronics)
NOTE
1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be
actually used shall be designed according to the interface for the applicable external device.
279
B62073E/04
Printer (Centronics)
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD9 01
STD0
JD9 02
STD1
JD9 03
STD2
JD9 04
STD3
JD9 12
0V
JD9 05
STD4
JD9 06
STD5
JD9 07
STD6
JD9 08
STD7
JD9 14
0V
JD9 09
PE
JD9 11
*STB
JD9 10
SLCT
JD9 13
*AFD
JD9 16
0V
JD9 15
*INIT
JD9 20
BUSY
JD9 17
*SLIN
JD9 19
*ERROR
JD9 18
0V
STD0
0V
STD1
0V
STD2
0V
STD3
0V
02
20
03
21
04
22
05
23
STD4
0V
STD5
0V
STD6
0V
STD7
0V
06
24
07
25
08
26
09
27
PE
0V
*STB
0V
SLCT
12
30
01
19
13
14
16
*AFD
0V
*INIT
0V
BUSY
0V
*SLIN
31
28
11
29
36
*ERROR
0V
32
33
FG
17
NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
280
B62073E/04
7.15
CONNECTION WITH
AN EXTENSION
ADAPTOR UNIT FOR
FANUC SERIES 15B
(MMCII)
Extension adapter unit
Control unit
MAIN CPU (01P3C)
JD5C: PCR20
JD5: PCR20
(Note 1)
To keyboard
M4 screw terminal
NOTE
1 It is not necessary to prepare the cable, because it is attached to the keyboard.
281
B62073E/04
(1) Connection for signal wire
MAIN CPU
JD5C 11
JD5C 12
JD5C 01
JD5C 02
JD5C 05
JD5C 04
JD5C 13
JD5C 14
D5C 10
D5C 19
D5C 06
D5C 08
D5C 16
Extension adapter
SDK
SDK
0V
0V
RDK
RDK
0V
0V
CSK
CSK
0V
0V
ERK
ERK
0V
0V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
JD5 11
JD5 12
JD5 01
JD5 02
JD5 05
JD5 04
JD5 13
JD5 14
JD5 10
JD5 19
JD5 06
JD5 08
JD5 16
NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
Recommended cable: A66L00010284#10P.
(2) Connection with the cable
Extension adapter
NOTE
The cable shall be 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or thicker. Ground
the cable.
282
B62073E/04
7.16
CONNECTION WITH
A HARD DISK UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES
15B (MMCII)
Hard disk unit
Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU (01P3C)
JD7: PCR50
JD7: PCR50
Power supply unit
NOTE
283
B62073E/04
Hard disk unit
CassetteStreamerunit
JD7B: PCR50
JD7A: PCR50
284
B62073E/04

MAIN CPU
(Hard disk unit)
Hard Disk Unit

(Cassette streamer unit)
JD7 26
JD7 01
JD7 27
JD7 02
JD7 28
JD7 03
JD7 29
JD7 04
JD7 30
*DB0
0V
*DB1
0V
*DB2
0V
*DB3
0V
*DB4
JD7 05
JD7 31
JD7 06
JD7 32
JD7 07
JD7 33
JD7 08
JD7 34
JD7 09
JD7 38
JD7 39
JD7 41
JD7 16
JD7 43
JD7 18
JD7 44
JD7 19
JD7 45
JD7 20
JD7 46
JD7 21
JD7 47
JD7 22
JD7 48
JD7 23
JD7 49
0V
*DB5
0V
*DB6
0V
*DB7
0V
*DBP
0V
*TERMPWR
0V
*ATN
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*C/D
0V
*REQ
JD7 24
JD7 50
JD7 25
JD7 35
JD7 10
JD7 36
JD7 11
JD7 37
JD7 12
JD7 40
JD7 15
JD7 42
JD7 17
JD7 14
JD7 13
0V
*I/O
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
285
*DB0
0V
*DB1
0V
*DB2
0V
*DB3
0V
*DB4
JD7 26
JD7 01
JD7 27
JD7 02
JD7 28
JD7 03
JD7 29
JD7 04
JD7 30
0V
*DB5
0V
*DB6
0V
*DB7
0V
*DBP
0V
*TERMPWR
0V
*ATN
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*C/D
0V
*REQ
JD7 05
JD7 31
JD7 06
JD7 32
JD7 07
JD7 33
JD7 08
JD7 34
JD7 09
JD7 38
JD7 39
JD7 41
JD7 16
JD7 43
JD7 18
JD7 44
JD7 19
JD7 45
JD7 20
JD7 46
JD7 21
JD7 47
JD7 22
JD7 48
JD7 23
JD7 49
0V
*I/O
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
JD7 24
JD7 50
JD7 25
JD7 35
JD7 10
JD7 36
JD7 11
JD7 37
JD7 12
JD7 40
JD7 15
JD7 42
JD7 17
JD7 14
JD7 13
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 Use a shielded cable containing 25 pairs of AWG28 wires,
with a characteristic impedance of 100 to 130 ohms.
Recommended cable material: A66L00010319#25P
2 For noise protection, thread the shielded cable through
ferrite cores as shown below and connect the shield to the
frame ground at both ends.
Connector
Connector
Ferrite core
Ferrite core
Cable
f
FG
f
FG
NOTE
3 Ensure that the total signal cable length (J11M + J66M)
does not exceed 6 m.
(2) Power connection
CP3 1
PW1 1
CP3 2
PW1 2
CP3 3
PW1 3
NOTE
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power
cable.
286
B62073E/04
7.17
Connection with portable 5.25 and portable 3.5 floppy disk unit
CONNECTION WITH
A FLOPPY DISK UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES
15B (MMCII)
Control unit
Portable floppy disk unit
MMCII MAIN CPU (01P3C)

JD8: PCR50
JD8: PCR50
NOTE
287
B62073E/04

MAIN CPU
JD8 07
JD8 08
JD8 38
JD8 39
JD8 09
JD8 10
JD8 36
JD8 37
JD8 17
JD8 18
JD8 40
JD8 41
JD8 26
JD8 27
JD8 34
JD8 35
JD8 28
JD8 29
JD8 32
JD8 33
JD8 15
JD8 16
JD8 30
JD8 31
JD8 13
JD8 14
JD8 03
JD8 04
JD8 05
JD8 06
JD8 11
JD8 12
JD8 01
JD8 02
JD8 19
JD8 20
JD8 42
JD8 43
JD8 44
JD8 45
JD8 46
JD8 47
JD8 21
JD8 22
JD8 23
JD8 48
*MON
0V
*MODE
0V
*DS0
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS2
0V
*DS3
0V
*SIDE
0V
*HDLD
0V
*TRK0
0V
*INDEX
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WE
0V
*WPRT
0V
*WDATA
0V
*RDATA
0V
*READY
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
*MON
0V
*MODE
0V
*DS0
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS2
0V
*DS3
0V
*SIDE
0V
*HDLD
0V
*TRK0
0V
*INDEX
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WE
0V
*WPRT
0V
*WDATA
0V
*RDATA
0V
*READY
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
288
Portable
FDD Unit
JD8 07
JD8 08
JD8 38
JD8 39
JD8 09
JD8 10
JD8 36
JD8 37
JD8 17
JD8 18
JD8 40
JD8 41
JD8 26
JD8 27
JD8 34
JD8 35
JD8 28
JD8 29
JD8 32
JD8 33
JD8 15
JD8 16
JD8 30
JD8 31
JD8 13
JD8 14
JD8 03
JD8 04
JD8 05
JD8 06
JD8 11
JD8 12
JD8 01
JD8 02
JD8 19
JD8 20
JD8 42
JD8 43
JD8 44
JD8 45
JD8 46
JD8 47
JD8 21
JD8 22
JD8 23
JD8 48
B62073E/04
NOTE
1 The cable for J12M shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.
Connect the units in accordance with the diagram on the previous page, and fasten the shield
with a cable clamp.
2 The cable must not be more than 2 m long.
(2) Connection with the cable
Portable 5.25
FDD Unit
AC100V to
AC240V
PW1 1
PW1 2
PW1 3
NOTE
The cable shall be 20/0.18 (0.5 mm2) or thicker.
289
B62073E/04
7.18
RS232C SERIAL
PORT (MMCIII)
Host Computer (Example)
MMCIII CPU Board

JD5F to JD5H
(PCREV20MDT)
The signal marked with ( )

connect to FANUC I/O device side.
Signal connection
(1) When the terminals (CS, DR, CD) can not be used.
MMCIII CPU Board
Host
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
(SIGNAL GROUND)
SG
SG
(FRAME GROUND)
FG
FG
290
B62073E/04
(2) When all signals can be used.

MMCIII CPU Board
Modem
SD
SD
RD
RD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
CD
(SIGNAL GROUND)
SG
SG
(FRAME GROUND)
FG
FG
NOTE
291
B62073E/04
7.19
OUTER HARD DISK
INTERFACE
(MMCIII)
Minislot
Outer Hard Disk Interface Board

A02B0161K800 Cable for Data transmission or
Cable attached with external hard disk.
POKEDY 2.5 A87L00010135
Refer to the wiring diagram on the next page.
NOTE
292
B62073E/04
Cable Wiring
*D0
0V
*D1
0V
*D2
0V
*D3
0V
*D4
0V
*D5
0V
*D6
0V
*D7
0V
*DP
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
*ATN
0V
0V
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*CD
0V
*REQ
0V
*IO
0V
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
293
*D0
0V
*D1
0V
*D2
0V
*D3
0V
*D4
0V
*D5
0V
*D6
0V
*D7
0V
*DP
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
*ATN
0V
0V
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*CD
0V
*REQ
0V
*IO
0V
8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
B62073E/04
NOTE
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
We recommend appropriate use of the emergency stop signal when

designing a safe machine tool.
The emergency stop signal is for stopping the machine tool in an
emergency, and is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier and spindle
amplifier. Generally, Bcontact pushbutton switches are used for the
emergency stop signal.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller is set to an emergency stop canceled state, and the servo
amplifier and spindle motor can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is open, the CNC
controller is reset to an emergency stop state, and the servo amplifier and
spindle motor are decelerated and stopped.
In the case of the servo motor, the drive power supply of the servo
amplifier is turned OFF to activate a dynamic brake and stop servo motor
operation. Since gravity causes the servo motor used for the gravity shaft
to continue operation, you must consider using a servo motor with a
brake.
In the case of the spindle motor, if the drive power supply of the spindle
amplifier is suddenly turned OFF turning spindle operation, inertia causes
the spindle to continue operation, which is more dangerous. The spindle
motor must be controlled in such a way that deceleration and stopping of
spindle motor operation is confirmed before its drive power supply is
turned OFF when the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact has become
open.
The above have been taken into consideration in FANUCs series of
control amplifiers. On these control amplifiers, input the emergency stop
signal to the power supply module (PSM). Since the drive power supply
MCC control signal is output from the PSM, use this signal to control
ON/OFF switching of the drive power supply that is input to the power
supply module.
Detection of overtravel by the software limit function is included in the
basic specifications of this CNC controller, and limit switches for regular
detection of overtravel are not required. However, if a malfunction in the
servo feedback system causes the machine tool to move beyond the
software limits, provide stroke end limit switches so that the emergency
stop signal functions to stop the machine tool.
Figure 8 shows a example of how the emergency stop signal is connected
when this CNC controller and an series control amplifier are used.
294
8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
B62073E/04
Stroke end limit switch
Emergency
stop button
Relay power
supply
Release switch
Spark killer
Relay
I/O unit connected to CNC

(module)
series control amplifier (PSM)
External power
supply
Spark killer
Coil
Breaker 1
MCC
AC reactor
Fig. 8
NOTE
When the amplifier is connected to a spindle motor made by
another manufacturer, a sequence for safely decelerating
and stopping the spindle motor when the emergency stop
signal contact becomes open during spindle motor
operation must be incorporated referring to the instruction
manual for the spindle motor.
295
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Fig. 1 (a)
External view of 3slot control unit
Fig. 1 (b)
Fig. 1 (c)
Fig. 1 (d)
Fig. 2 (a)
External view of horizontal type 9I CRT/MDI unit, (Small type,

monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9I PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)
Fig. 2 (b)
External view of horizontal type 9 small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)
Fig. 2 (c)
External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard,

monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9 PDP/MDI unit (standard)
Fig. 2 (d)
External dimensions of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit

(standard, monochrome CRT)
Fig. 2 (e)
External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)
Fig. 2 (f)
External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]
External view of horizontal type 10.4 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5
kg]
Fig. 2 (g)
External view of horizontal type 10.4 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0
kg]
Fig. 2 (h)
14 CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)
Fig. 2 (i)
14 CRT/MDI unit (vertical)
Fig. 2 (j)
9 separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT) 9 separate type

PDP unit
Fig. 2 (k)
9 separate type CRT unit (color)
Fig. 2 (l)
Separate type MDI unit (standard)
Fig. 2 (m)
External dimensions of separate type 10.4 LCD unit
Fig. 2 (n)
External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal)

(for separate type LCD with builtin graphic function)
Fig. 2 (p)
External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)

Fig. 2 (q)
External dimensions
(monochrome STN)
Fig. 3 (a)
External view of control transformer (A80L00010176)
Fig. 3 (b)
Description of control transformer
331
of
separate
type
9.5
LCD
unit
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Fig. 4 (a)
External view of position coder A or B

A86L00260001#102: Max. 4000 rpm
A86L00260001#002: Max. 6000rpm
Fig. 4 (b)
External dimensions of position coder A8600309T302: Max.

10,000 rpm
Fig. 5 (a)
External view of manual pulse generator A8600202T001
Fig. 5 (b)
External view of pendant type manual pulse generator

A8600202T004 to T015
Fig. 6
External view of FANUC PPR
Fig. 7 (a)
External view of punch panel (CE marking noncompliant)
Fig. 7 (b)
External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
Fig. 7 (c)
External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
Fig. 8
External view of floppy cassette adapter
Fig. 9
External view of FANUC Handy File
Fig. 10
External view of portable tape reader
Fig. 11
External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)
Fig. 12
External view of tape reader with reels
Fig. 13 (a)
External view of input unit (A14B0076B001)
Fig. 13 (b)
External view of input unit (Multiple axis) (A14B0076B401)
Fig. 13 (c)
External dimensions of input unit (multiaxis machine)

(A14B0076B402)
Fig. 13 (d)
External view of expanded power input unit (A14B0076B209)
Fig. 14 (a)
External view of PCR connector (soldering type)
Fig. 14 (b)
External view of FI40 connector
Fig. 15 (a)
External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)
Fig. 15 (b)
External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV2 type)
Fig. 15 (c)
External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)
Fig. 15 (d)
External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV type)
Fig. 16 (a)
External view of AMP connector (11781283)
Fig. 16 (b)
Fig. 16 (c)
Fig. 16 (d)
Fig. 16 (e)
External view of AMP connector (11751962/5, 1752182/5)
Fig. 17 (a)
External view of HONDA connector (case)
Fig. 17 (b)
External view of HONDA connector (female)
Fig. 17 (c)
External view of HONDA connector (male)
332
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Fig. 17 (d)
External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)
Fig. 18 (a)
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)
Fig. 18 (b)
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)
Fig. 18 (c)
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)
Fig. 18 (d)
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)
Fig. 18 (e)
External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)
Fig. 19 (a)
External view of reader puncher panel connector
Fig. 19 (b)
External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock
Fig. 20
External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader
Fig. 21
External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder
Fig. 22
External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15B

(MMCII)
Fig. 23
External View of the Keyboard for Series 15B (MMCII)
Fig. 24
External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15B (MMCII)
Fig. 25
External view of the Portable 5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B
(MMCII)
Fig. 26
External view of the Portable 3.5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B
(MMCII)
Fig. 27
External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series

15B (MMCII) (A08B0047C071)
333
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Weight: 2.3 kg
Fig. 1 (a) External view of 3slot control unit
334
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Weight: 2.5 kg
Fig. 1 (b) External view of 4slot control unit
335
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Weight: 3.8 kg
Fig. 1 (c) External view of 6slot control unit
336
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Weight: 5.0 kg
Fig. 1 (d) External view of 8slot control unit
337
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Panel cut drawing
85 (PDP)
220 (Monochrome CRT)
CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the
outer periphery on the rear of the operators panel PCB.
Weight: 4.0 kg
Fig. 2 (a) External view of horizontal type 9I CRT/MDI unit, (Small type, monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9I PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)
Panel cut drawing
Unit support
(for reference)
An appropriate support for the
CRT unit should be provided.
Weight: 8 kg
Fig. 2 (b) External view of horizontal type 9 small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)
338
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Panel cut drawing
85 (PDP)
Weight: 4.0 kg
Fig. 2 (c) External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9 PDP/MDI unit (standard)
339
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 5 kg
Fig. 2 (d) External dimensions of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)
340
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Panel cut drawing
Unit support
(for reference)
Weight: 8 kg
An appropriate support for the

CRT unit should be provided.
Fig. 2 (e) External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)
Panel cut drawing
CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.
Fig. 2 (f) External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]
341
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (g) External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]
342
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Fig. 2 (h) 14 CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)
343
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
VIEW FROM REAR SIDE

8f 4.8
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 20 kg
Fig. 2 (i) 14 CRT/MDI unit (vertical)
344
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Panel cut drawing
85 (PDP)
Weight: 3.5 kg
Fig. 2 (j) 9 separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT)

9 separate type PDP unit
345
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 8 kg
Fig. 2 (k) 9 separate type CRT unit (color)
346
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Panel cut drawing
Weight: 0.5 kg
Fig. 2 (l) Separate type MDI unit (standard)
347
APPENDIX
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (m) External dimensions of separate type 10.4 LCD unit
348
B62073E/04
Weight: 2 kg
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (n) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal)

349
Weight: 1 kg
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (p) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)

350
Weight: 1 kg
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Weight: 2 kg
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 2 (q) External dimensions of separate type 9.5 LCD unit (monochrome STN)
351
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
CAUTION
TURN MAIN LINE SWITCH OFF BEFORE HANDLING TB1 OR
TB2
Max. 175
Max. 155
Weight: 14 kg
Unit:
mm
Fig. 3 (a) External view of control transformer (A80L00010176)
352
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Specification of control transformer

(1) Primary side rated voltage
AC200V/220V/230V/380V/415V/440V/460V/480V/550V
(2) Voltage fluctuation
Primary side rated voltage 15%
(3) Frequency
50Hz/60Hz3Hz
(4) Secondary side line voltage
See the figure below.
(5) Secondary side voltage deviation
Less than 3%
(6) Secondary side voltage regulation
Less than 7%
(7) Transformer ambient temperature and humidity
5C+60C 10 to 95% (Relative humidity)
TB1
550
480
460
200 to 550V
440
415
380
240
230
220
200
COM
TB1
200A
200V
100A
100V
200B
100B
Fig. 3 (b) Description of control transformer
353
5A
1A
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Connector
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 103 kgcmsec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 gcm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial
Thrust
Operation
1 kg or less
1 kg or less
Idle
20 kg or less
10 kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the
timing belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the above
allowable value.
(4) Weight: 1 kg or less
Unit: mm
Fig. 4 (a) External view of position coder A or B A86L00260001#102: Max. 4000 rpm
A86L00260001#002: Max. 6000rpm
354
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
MS connector: MS3102A2029P
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:

(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 103 kgcmsec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 gcm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial
Thrust
Operation
10 kg or less
5 kg or less
Idle
20 kg or less
10 kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the
timing belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the above
allowable value.
(4) Weight: Approx. 750 g
Unit: mm
Fig. 4 (b) a External dimensions of position coder A8600309T302: Max. 10,000 rpm
355
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
3 holes equally spaced on a 72 dia
M3 screw terminal
Fig. 5(a) External view of manual pulse generator

A8600202T001
356
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
(1) A8600202T004 to T009
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
(2) A8600202T010 to T015
M3 screw terminal
M3 screw terminal
Fig. 5 (b) External view of pendant type manual pulse generator

A8600202T004 to T015
357
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Cable length:
Weight:
Unit:
Fig. 6 External view of FANUC PPR
358
1.5 m
about 12 kg
mm
APPENDIX
4-M3
B62073E/04
Color: PMEN1.53G
4- f 3.6
Japan Aviation
Electronic
DBM-25S
Length: 200 mm
For crimp terminal M4

for frame grounding
Honda Tsushin
Connector: PCR-E20FS
Cover:
PCS-E20LA
Panel cutout
Fig. 7 (a) External view of punch panel (CE marking noncompliant)
NOTE
A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.
359
APPENDIX
Japan Aviation Electronic

DBM-25S
Length: 200 mm
For crimp terminal

M4 for frame grounding
Honda Tsushin
Cover:
PCS-E20LA
4- f 3.6
External dimensions of wide type
B62073E/04
Panel cutout
Paint masking area on punch panel side
Fig. 7 (b) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
NOTE
1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust
and waterproofing.
2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel
must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked with
a paint band to make it electrically conductive.
3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on the
locker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.
4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.
360
APPENDIX
External dimensions of thin type
Japan Aviation Electronic

DBM-25S
Length: 200 mm
For crimp terminal

M4 for frame grounding
Honda Tsushin
Cover:
PCS-E20LA
Panel cutout
Paint masking area on punch panel side
B62073E/04
Fig. 7 (c) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)
NOTE
1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust
and waterproofing.
2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel
must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked with
a paint band to make it electrically conductive.
3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on the
locker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.
4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.
361
APPENDIX
Fig. 8 External view of floppy cassette adapter
362
B62073E/04
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Cable length: 3.0 mm

Weight:
1.4 kg
Unit:
mm
Fig. 9 External view of FANUC Handy File
363
APPENDIX
Paint:
Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish
Weight: About 15 kg
Fig. 10 External view of portable tape reader
364
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
AUTO
RELEASE
MANUAL
Wiring screw M3 6
Power
terminal strip
Signal cable
View from
arrow A
Cable holder
4 f 5.3
Signal cable connector

(Panel installation hole
layout diagram)
Coating Color: Metallic silver
Weight:
6 kg
Unit:
mm
Fig. 11 External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)
NOTE
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.
If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
296
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
AUTO
REEL ON
ALARM
RELEASE
REEL OFF
FORWARD STOP REWIND
View from arrow
fA
M5 10
Stud
4 f 5.3
RS232C
interface connector
Power connector
(Panel installation hole

layout diagram)
Parallel interface
connector
Coating Color: Metallic silver
Weight:
9 kg
Unit:
mm
Fig. 12 External view of tape reader with reels
NOTE
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.
If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
297
APPENDIX
Fig. 13 (a) External view of input unit

(A14B0076B001)
298
B62073E/04
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Fig. 13 (b) External view of input unit (Multiple axis)

(A14B0076B401)
299
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
(AC INPUT)
Key location
15B INPUT Unit PCB
Connector arrangement on the PCB
CPD1 (AC OUTPUT)
F11 (AC INPUT FUSE)

F12 (AC INPUT FUSE)
F13 (DC OUTPUT FUSE)
CPD2A (POWER CONTROL)
CPD2B (POWER CONTROL)
CPD2C (POWER CONTROL)
LED of pilot lamp (Green)

LED of alarm lamp (Red)
Fig. 13 (c) External dimensions of input unit (multiaxis machine)

(A14B0076B402)
300
Screw for grounding (M4)
APPENDIX
Screw terminal block (M4)
B62073E/04
Fig. 13 (d) External view of expanded power input unit

(A14B0076B209)
301
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
HONDA PCRE20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)
USAGE:
GENERAL
MATING: HONDA PCSE20LA (METAL)

HOUSING: HONDA PCSV20L (PLASTIC)
Display
HONDA
PCRE20FS
21.65
11.43
Fig. 14 (a) External view of PCR connector (soldering type)
302
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
HIROSE FI402015S
USAGE:
PULSE CODER INTERFACE

LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING:
HIROSE FI20CV
Tab for
shield
connec
tion
Section AA
Fig. 14 (b) External view of FI40 connector
303
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
HONDA PCRV20LA (for 6 dia. cable)

PCRV20LB (for 8 dia. cable)
USAGE:
GENERAL

Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
Fig. 15 (a) External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)
304
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
HIROSE FI20CV2
USAGE:
GENERAL
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever

Fig. 15 (b) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV2 type)
305
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
FUJITSU FCN240C 20Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)
USAGE:
GENERAL
Cable clamp
Screw
Lock lever
Fig. 15 (c) External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)
306
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
HIROSE FI20CV
USAGE:
PULSE CODER INTERFACE

LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
Case
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Cable clamp

Fig. 15 (d) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV type)
307
APPENDIX
TYPE:
B62073E/04
AMP 11781283
USAGE:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
200VAC INPUT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

200VAC OUTPUT
10I LCD/MDI UNIT
CP1
CP1
CP2
CP11
200B
200A
200B
200A
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (a) External view of AMP connector (11781283)
308
Key location
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
AMP 21781296
USAGE:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
ON/OFF CONTROL
CP4
B3
FB
A3
COM
B2
FA
A2
OFF
B1
AL
A1
ON
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (b) External view of AMP connector (21781296)
309
APPENDIX
TYPE:
B62073E/04
AMP 21782883
USAGE:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

+24V OUTPUT
CP5
0V
+24V
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (c) External view of AMP connector (21782883)
310
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
TYPE:
AMP 11782883
USAGE:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

+24E OUTPUT
CP6
0V
+24E
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. 16 (d) External view of AMP connector (11782883)
311
APPENDIX
TYPE:
AMP 11752182 (Gold coated)

AMP 11752185 (Tin coated)
Reel:
AMP 11751962 (Gold coated)

AMP 11751965 (Tin coated)
WIRE:
AWG 16, 18, 20
B62073E/04
In case of reel
PLATING IDMARK
PRESSER IDMARK
Fig. 16 (e) External view of AMP connector (11751962/5, 1752182/5)
312
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Symbol
(B)
(D)
Number of
terminals
39.3
44.9
39.8
17
20
67.9
73.5
44.8
18
50
Specification
MR20LMH (Plug)
MR20LFH
(Jack)
MR50LMH (Plug)
MR50LFH
(Jack)
Symbol
Outer diameter of the cable

MR20L dia. 10 mm
max
ME50L dia. 16 mm max
Name
Connector cover
Cable clamp
Stopper
Screw for cable clamp

Plug (MR20, 50MH)
Jack (MR20, 50FH)
Fig. 17 (a) External view of HONDA connector (case)
313
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Number of
terminals
MR20RHF
32.8
27.8
20
MR50RHF
61.4
56.4
50
Symbol
Name
Cable clamp
Screw 2.6 dia. 8
Connector (MR20, 50FH)
Fig. 17 (b) External view of HONDA connector (female)
314
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Number of
terminals
MR20RMH
32.8
27.8
20
MR50RMH
61.4
56.4
50
Symbol
Name
Cable clamp
Screw 2.6 dia. 8
Connector (MR20, 50FH)
Fig. 17 (c) External view of HONDA connector (male)
315
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
MR50MH
(50core, plug)
MR50FH
(50core, plug)
MR20MH
(20core, plug)
MR20FH
(20core, plug)
Fig. 17 (d) External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)
316
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Manufacturer: FCI Japan
Name
Connector housing for cable
Specification
(Connector maker
number)
SMS3PK5
Black
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Solder type)
RC16MSCT3
For details on tools required

for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.
Contact
Cables:
Remarks
Cross sectional area:

Insulation diameter:
Peeling length:
0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)

2.8 mm max
7.2 mm
Fig. 18 (a) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)
317
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Name
Specification
(Connector maker
number)
SMS3PNS5
Brown
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Solder type)
RC16MSCT3

the manufacturer.
Contact
Cables:
Remarks

Peeling length:
0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)

2.8 mm max
7.2 mm
Fig. 18 (b) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)
318
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Name

(Crimp type)
Specification
(Connector maker
number)
SMS3PWS5
White
RC16M23D28

the manufacturer.
Contact
Cables:

Peeling length:
Remarks
0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)

2.8 mm max
7.2 mm
Fig. 18 (c) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)
319
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Name
Specification
(Connector maker
number)
SMS6PN5
Brown
(Crimp type)
RC16M23T3
(Solder type)
RC16MSCT3

the manufacturer.
Contact
Cables:
Remarks

Peeling length:
1.27 mm2 (50/0.18)

2.8 mm max
7.2 mm
Fig. 18 (d) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)
320
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Name

(Crimp type)
Specification
(Connector maker
number)
SMS6PW5
White
RC16M23T28

the manufacturer.
Contact
Cables:

Peeling length:
Remarks
1.27 mm2 (50/0.18)

2.8 mm max
7.2 mm
Fig. 18 (e) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)
321
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
A
B
53.0
38.3
D
E
17.8
12.6
G 10.7
H 11.2
47.0
41.3
AA
cross section
23.05 f
Fig. 19 (a) External view of reader puncher panel connector

M2.6 P0.45 screw
Interlock
screw
Small round
head screw
1.2 groove
Spring washer
Fig. 19 (b) External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock
Color: Cream
Fig. 20 External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader
NOTE
When connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)
322
10.8
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Minus polarity indication

4M4 counter sinking
Plus polarity indication
Plus terminal with

3M3 screw holes
Minus terminal with

3M3 screw holes
4f 4.3 Mounting holes
Arrow view A
Fig. 21 External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder
323
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Fig. 22 External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15B (MMCII)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof.
2 Ambient temperature during operation: 0C to 40C
3 Weight: 1 kg
Tilt mechanism
Fig. 23 External View of the Keyboard for Series 15B (MMCII)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof.
2 A 0.6m signal cable is attached.
4 Weight: 2.5 kg
324
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Air flow
2f 5.8
Fig. 24 External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15B (MMCII)
NOTE
1 This is not dustproof type. Build in to the magnetics cabinet of an enclosed structure together
with the control unit.
2 Ambient temperature at operation: 5C to 55C
3 Other environmental conditions are the same as in the control unit.
4 Install in the direction of the air flow being upward as shown in the diagram above. Do not install
in the direction of the air flow being sideways.
5 Weight: 3.5 kg
325
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Fig. 25 External view of the Portable 5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B (MMCII)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof. Use this unit exclusively for program development.
3 Purchase the floppy disk unit, 1.5m signal cable and 1.6m power supply cable from FANUC.
(A08B0047K822)
4 Weight: 6 kg
326
B62073E/04
APPENDIX
Fig. 26 External view of the Portable 3.5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B (MMCII)
NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof. It should be used for program development only.
2 Maintain an operating ambient temperature range of 5C to 35C.
3 The floppy disk unit, and the 1.5m signal cable and 1.5m power cable are to be purchased
from FANUC. (A08B0047K822)
4 Weight: 3.5 kg
327
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Fig. 27 External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series 15B (MMCII) (A08B0047C071)
328
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS

AND CABLES
20PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
(1) Connector for the PC board

Model: PCREV20MDT manufactured by Honda Tsushin
The connector for the PC board has been specially developed support
FANUCs highmounting density. The one of each makers including
PCR connectors made by Honda Tsushin are compatible with the
mating part of the connector and can be selected for the cable
connection.
(2) Cable connector
The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced
as standard products.
Use
Cable
connector
General
purpose
MDI,
IOLINK,
AMP,
SPDL
Connector
body
Housing
Pulse coder,
coaxial cables,
linear scale,
manual pulse
generator
Housing
Connector
model name
Case model
name
HONDA
Tsushin
PCRE20FA
PCRV20LA*
PCSE20LA
f 6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)f

6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)
HIROSE
Electric
FI3020S*
FI20CV2*
f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)
FUJITSU
FCN247J020
G/E
FCN240C020
Y/S*
f 5.8mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
Mores
526222011*
526242015*
f 6.2mm (f 5.9 to 6.5)
HONDA
Tsushin
PCRE20FS
PCRV20LA*
PCSE20LA
f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
HIROSE
Electric
FI4020S*
FI40B20S*
(FI40A20S*)
FI20CV2*
FI20CV5*
f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)

f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)
FI40B20S*
FI20CV6*
f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)
FI40B2015S*
(FI402015S*)
FI20CV*
f 8.5mm (f 8.0 to 9.0)
FI40B20S*
(FI40A20S*)
FI20CV5*
f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)
FI40B20S*
FI20CV6*
f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)
PCRE20FS
PCRV20LA*
PCSE20LA
f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)
Manufacturer
Type
HIROSE
Electric
HONDA
Tsushin
Applicable
cable O.D.
Fig. C (a) Cable connectors
NOTE
Use the same makers connector body and housing to
combine them.
365

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
(3) Required tools for Connection of cable connector

(a) Separatewire pressmount type
Connector: PCRE20FA (Honda Tsushin)
28AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much more
cost effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder or
pressmount type connectors. Inquire the each connector maker about
the connection tools.
(b) Solder type
Connector: PCRE20FS (Honda Tsushin) or
FI402015S (Hirose)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the Honda Tsushin
connector. However, soldering many of these wires together lowers
work efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion of the
connector is too small to support it.
To increase work efficiency Hirose has developed a new connector.
By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has a pitch
equal to that of the conventional Honda MF connectors. The
FI402015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and manual pulse
generators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for connection
with a +5 V power source.
The following table describes the details of soldered connectors and
cases.
Table C (a) Details of soldered connectors and cases.
D Connector
Connector model (manufacturer)
Description
PCRE20FS (HONDA Tsushin)
Soldered connector for generalpurpose applications compatible with smalllot

cable assemblies and cable assemblies at the site.
FI420S (HIROSE Electric)
HONDA Tsushin PCRE20FS or equivalent product
FI40B20S (HIROSE Electric)

(previously FI40A20S)
This connector has the same number of pins as the FI4020S, and has a wider row
alignment at its soldering section for facilitating soldering which makes it more
suitable for soldering thick electrical leads. This connector features higher terminal
strength over the FI40A20S (suitable for soldering electrical leads up to #20AWG
thick) and is suitable for electrical leads up to #17AWG thick. Note, however, that
when thick electrical leads such as #17AWG are used, we recommend using higher
strength case such as the FI20CV6.
FI40B2015S (HIROSE Electric)

This connector utilizes the space obtained by skipping some of the pins to produce
a wider pitch at the soldering section. The FI40B2015S is an improved version of
the F1402015S, and features higher terminal strength. This allows electrical leads
up to #17AWG in cables having an outside diameter of up to 8.5 mm to be partially
soldered.
D Case
Case model (manufacturer)
Description
FI20CV5 (HIROSE Electric)
This plastic case is recommended for the FI40B20S, and is suitable for cables up
to outside diameter 9.2 mm.
FI20CV6 (HIROSE Electric)
This diecast metal case has been developed for the FI40B20S, and is suitable for
thick cables up to outside diameter 10.25 mm.
366
APPENDIX
B62073E/04

AND CABLES
When cases and soldered connectors made by HIROSE Electric are used
in combination, you can select combinations shown in the figure below
in addition to those describes in Figure C(a). However, the outside
diameter of cables used must be compatible with the applicable outsider
diameter of the case.
Connector model
FI40B2015S
(previously FI402015S)
FI4020S
FI40B20S
Case model (applicable cable O.D.)

FI20CV (f 8.5 mm dia.) only compatible
FI20CV2 (f 6.2 mm)

FI20CV5 (f 9.2 mm)
FI20CV6 (f 10.25 mm)
These connectors and

cases are mutually
compatible.
(4) Recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible

cables
Table C (b) List of recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible cables
Name of connector in
connection manual
PCRE20FA
Connector body
FANUC authorized
connector
(manufacturer)
FCRE20FA
(HONDA Tsushin)
FANUC
authorized
housing (=case)
(manufacturer)
PCRV20AL
(HONDA Tsushin)
Compatible cable
(cable O.D.)
FANUC developed
product
FANUC specification No.
A66L00010284#10P
(O.D. 6.2 mm dia.)
Remarks
Plastic
PCSE20LA
(HONDA Tsushin)
Metal
FI3020S
(HIROSE Electric)
FI20CV2
(HIROSE Electric)
Plastic
FCN247J020G/E
(FUJITSU Takamisawa)
FCN240C020Y/
S
(FUJITSU
Takamisawa)
Plastic
526222011
(Morex)
526242015
(Morex)
Plastic
FCRE20FS
(HONDA Tsushin)
PCRV20LA
(HONDA Tsushin)
Plastic
PCSE20LA
(HONDA Tsushin)
Metal
FI4020S
(HIROSE Electric)
FI20CV2
(HIROSE Electric)
Plastic
FI40B2015S
15pin soldered type
FI40B2015S
(HIROSE Electric)
FI20CV
(HIROSE Electric)
A66L00010286 (Note)
A66L00010402 (Note)
(O.D. 8.5 mm dia.)
Plastic
FI40B20S
Housing
FI40B20S
(HIROSE Electric)
FI20CV5
(HIROSE Electric)
A66L00010367
A66L00010368
(O.D. 9.2 mm dia.)
Plastic
FI40B20S
(HIROSE Electric)
FI20CV6
(HIROSE Electric)
A66L00010403 (Note)
(O.D. 9.8 mm dia.)
Metal
PCRE20FS
Housing
367

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
NOTE
Up till now we have recommend using pulse coder cable (A66L00010286) up to 20 m in
length. We have developed two new cables: A66L00010402 that can be used up to 30 m,
and A66L00010403 that can be used up to 50 m. (For detailed specifications, see Figure 4.)
These cables (A66L00010402 and A66L00010403) not only demonstrate the same oil
resistance as cable A66L00010286, they are also bendresistant (100 mm dia. cables can
be bent up to one million operations), and comply with UL and CSA standards.
(5) Cable wires
Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine
tool builder for the Series 15B/16/18.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface
connector of the Series 15B/16/18. They are listed in the table below,
for your convenience when ordering from the manufacturer.
(In addition to these, a cable for moving parts is under development.)
Cable type
Use
Structure
FANUC
specification No.
Manufacturer
Remarks
10pair cable
General purpose
Ten 0.08mm2
pairs
A66L00010284#10P
Hitachi Cable,
Oki Electric Cable
6core coaxial
cable
CRT interface
Coaxial six
cores
A66L00010296
Hitachi Cable
50 m maximum
Composite
12core cable
(Note 2)
Pulse coders, linear Six 0.5mm2

A66L00010286
scales, and manual wires and three
pulse generators
0.18mm2 pairs
Hitachi Cable,
Oki Electric Cable
20 m maximum
(Note 2)
NOTE
For the pulse coder, scale, and manual pulse generator, each of which has a +5V power
supply, wires need to be selected taking into consideration the supply voltage drop caused by
the resistance of the cable.
A66L00010286 has been designed for use with a cable length of 20 mm or less. If the cable
length exceeds 20 m, connect A66L00010286 to a cable with a lower resistance, such as
A66L00010157.
The number of manual pulse generators to be connected is assumed to be three. If only one
generator is connected, the cable can be extended to a maximum of 50 m by connecting wires
with in parallel a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2 for the power supply.
368

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
(6) 10pair cable
(a) Specifications
Item
Unit
Specifications
Product No.
A66L00010284#10P
Manufacturer
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating
60_C 30 V: UL2789
80_C 30 V: UL80276
Conductor
Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B286)
Insulator
Crosslinked vinyl
Shield braid
Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath
Heatresistant oilproof vinyl
Material
Number of pairs
Conductor
Pairs
10
AWG
28
Conductors/
mm
7/0.127
Outside diameter
mm
0.38
Thickness
mm
0.1
Thinnest portion: 008 (3.1 mm)
Outside diameter
(approx.)
mm
0.58
Core style (rating)
mm
UL1571 (80_C, 30V)
Outside diameter
(approx.)
mm
1.16
Pitch
mm
20 or less
Size
Structure
Insulator
Twisted pair
Lay
Lay diameter (approx.)

Drain wire
Shield braid
Sheath
Standard length
Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then

wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,
apply a cable separator as required.
mm
3.5
Conductors/ Hitachi Cable:

Not available
mm
Oki Electric Cable: Available, 10/0.12
Element wire
diameter
mm
0.12
Braid density
85 or more
Color
Black
Thickness
mm
1.0
Outside diameter
(approx.)
mm
6.2
200
369

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Item
Unit
Specifications
Bundle
Electric
resistance
(at 20_C)
W/km
233 or less
Insulation
resistance
(at 20_C)
MWkm
10 or more
V/min.
300
Packing method
Electrical
performance
Dielectric strength
(AC)
Flame resistance
Shall pass flame resistance test VW1SC of UL standards.
(b) Indications on the cable

On the surface of the cable, print in indelible ink the ULcertified
component classification mark, UL style no., manufacturers
name, and flame resistance mark.
(c) Cable structure
Wire identification table (Hitachi)

Insulator color
1
10
2
5
3
6
8
4
7
Wire No.
Twistedpair wire
Binding tape
Shield braid
Sheath
First wire
Second wire
1
2
3
4
5
6
Blue
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
Blue
White
White
White
White
White
Brown
7
8
9
10
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.
Fig. C (b) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
370

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Drain wire
10
Twistedpair wire
Binding tape
Shield braid
Sheath

Dot mark
color
Dot
mark
(1 pitch) First Second
wire
wire
Pair
No.
Insulator
color
1
2
3
4
5
6
Orange
Gray
White
Yellow
Pink
Orange
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
7
8
9
10
Gray
White
Yellow
Pink
Red
Red
Red
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.
Fig. C (c) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
(7) Composite 12core cable
(a) Specifications
Item
Unit
Specifications
Product No.
A66L00010286
Manufacturer
Oki Cable, Ltd.

Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating
80C, 30 V
Conductor,
braidshielded
wire, drain wire
Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C 3152)
Insulator
Heatresistant flameretardant vinyl
Sheath
Oilproof, heatresistant, flameretardant vinyl
Material
Number of wires (wire nos.)
Cores
6 (1 to 6)
6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
Conductor
mm2
0.5
0.18
Conductors/
mm
20/0.18
7/0.18
Outside diameter
mm
0.94
0.54
Standard thickness
(The minimum
thickness is at least
80% of the standard
thickness.)
mm
0.25
0.2
Outside diameter
mm
1.50
0.94
Size
Structure
Insulator
371

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Item
Twisted pair
Outside diameter
Direction of lay
Pitch
Lay
Unit
Specifications
mm
1.88
Left
mm
20 or less
Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer is

righttwisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply a
cable separator as required.
mm
5.7
mm2
0.3
Wires/mm
12/0.18
Outside diameter
mm
0.72
Element wire
diameter
mm
0.12
Thickness
mm
0.3
70
mm
6.3
Black
Standard thickness
(The minimum
thickness is at least
85% of the standard
thickness.)
mm
1.1
Outside diameter
mm
8.5 Max. 9.0 (Note)
Standard length
100
Packing method
Bundle
Lay diameter
Drain wire
Size
Structure
Shield braid
Braid density
Outside diameter
Sheath
Electrical
performance
Color
Electric
resistance (at
20C) (wire nos.)
Insulation
resistance (at
20C)
Dielectric strength
(AC)
Flame resistance
/km
39.4
(1 to 6)
113
(7 to 9)
km
15
V/min.
500
Shall pass flame resistance test VW1SC of UL standards.
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.
372

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
(b) Markings on cable

(1) Name or symbol of the manufacturer
(2) Manufacturing year
(c) Cable structure
The cable structure is shown below.
Drain wire
Red
White
Red
Binding tape
Black
Black
Shield braid
Red
0.5mm2 insulated wire
Black
Red
Red
0.18mm2 twisted pair wire
Black
Sheath
Black
White
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
Item
Specifications
Product No.
A66L00010402
Manufacturer
Conductor
Oki Cable Ltd.
Structure
Conductors/mm
O.D.
Insulator
(polyester)
A66L00010403
mm
Color
Thickness
mm
Outside diameter
A core wire
B core wire
A core wire
B core wire
16/0.12
(0.18 mm2)
3/22/0.12
(0.75 mm2)
16/0.12
(0.18 mm2)
7/16/0.12
(1.25 mm2)
0.55
1.20
0.55
1.70
white, red, black
red, black
white, red, black
red, black
0.16
0.23
0.16
0.25
0.87
1.66
0.87
2.20
mm
Twisted pair
Structure
Direction of lay
whitered,
whiteblack,
blackred
whitered,
whiteblack,
blackred
Left
Pitch typ. 20 mm
Left
Pitch typ. 20 mm
373

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Item
Specifications
Product No.
A66L00010402
Manufacturer
Lay
Oki Cable Ltd.
Number of wires
3 pairs
Direction of lay
Taping
O.D.
Shield braid
Tape the outermost layer with

Japanese paper after twisting.
Tape the outermost layer with

Japanese paper after twisting.
5.7
6.9
0.14
Thickness standard mm
80
Wrap one wire set comprising 12/0.8 mm under the shield braid.
standard mm
6.4
O.D.
Black (matte)
1.05
1.1
Diagonally wrap Japanese paper tape underneath the sheath.
mm
Standard length
8.5" 0.3
9.8" 0.3
Short length
100
In principle, not recognized as a completed product.
Rating
80C 30 V
Standard
Must comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80C30V
FT1
Fire resistance
Insulation
performance
7.6
Color
Diagonal taping
Electrical
performance
6 cores
Left
Thickness standard mm
Performance of
completed
product
3 pairs
Element wire diameter

standard mm
O.D.
Completed
product
6 cores
Left
standard mm
Drain
Sheath
(polyester)
A66L00010403
Must pass VW1 and FT1.
Electric resistance
W/km (at 20C)
103 max.
25.5 max.
103 max.
Insulation resistance
MW/km (at 20C)
At least 1
Dielectric strength Vmin

.
A.C 500
Tensile strength N/mm2
At least 9.8
Elongation
At least 100
Tensile strength after

aging
%
70% or more of preaging value
Elongation after aging%
Aging conditions
113C, 168 hours
374
15.0 max.

AND CABLES
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Item
Specifications
Product No.
A66L00010402
Manufacturer
Sheath
performance
A66L00010403
Oki Cable Ltd.
Tensile strength N/mm2
At least 9.8
Elongation
At least 100
Tensile strength after

aging
%
Elongation after aging%
Aging conditions
113C, 168 hours
Cable structure
Binding tape
Shield braid
Pair lead A
Red
Red
Red
Black
Black
Red
Black
Single lead B
Red
Drain wire
Sheath
375
D. ATTACHING THE CRT

PROTECTIVE COVER
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER
A CRT protective cover must be attached to the 9 monochrome CRT to

comply with CE marking (machine tool) directives.
The 9 monochrome CRT is also provided with a protective cover
(specification : A02B0200K820) between its top surface and rear
surface.
376
D. ATTACHING THE CRT

PROTECTIVE COVER
APPENDIX
B62073E/04
Bottom cover
Insert under panel.
Attaching the bottom cover (viewed from below)
Insert under panel.

Insert between panels.
Side cover
Attaching the side cover (viewed from side)
CRT protective cover
377
Index
B62073E/04
Numbers
Connection between the series 15B (MMCII) and peripheral

units, 275
10.4 LCD display interface (CE marking compliant with

builtin graphic function), 222
Connection diagram, 134

Connection diagram for MMCIV, 92
14 analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD display interface (CE

marking compliant when MMCIV is not used), 218
Connection diagram for series 15B (in case of MMCIII), 89,

91
14 analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD display interface (CE

marking compliant when MMCIV is used), 220
Connection diagram for series 15MB or series 150MB (in

case of multiple axis), 83
20pin interface connectors and cables, 366
Connection diagram for series 15TB/TTB/MB (when

LCD/MDI unit with builtin graphic functions is used), 77
9 CRT or 9 PDP display interface (CE marking

noncompliant), 214
Connection diagram for series

15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150TB/MB/TTB
(in case of analog spindle), 80
9 CRT or PDP display interface (CE marking compliant), 216

(in case of serial spindle), 74
A
Additional cabinet (in case of analog spindle interface), 86

(when LCD/MDI unit with builtin graphic functions is not
used), 74
Additional cabinet (in case of serial spindle interface), 85
Connection of FANUC I/O link by electric cable, 125
Addressfixed signals, 207
Connection of FANUC I/O link by optical fiber cable, 126
Adjusting the flat display, 224
Connection of I/O units to machine interface, 120
ALARM LEDs on source output operators panel connection

unit, 195
Connection of input unit for additional cabinet A, 115
Action against noise, 30
Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet A, 105
Analog spindle interface, 256
Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet B, 110
APC battery interface, 272
Connection of operators panel connection unit, 175
Attaching the CRT protective cover, 377
Connection of reference position approach signal, 247

Connection of source output operators panel connection unit,
189
Connection of tape reader with reels, 235

Connection of tape reader without reels, 234
Battery for memory backup, 44
Connection of the FANUC I/O link, 123

Connection of the FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A, 131
Connection pin assignment addresses of source output
operators panel connection unit, 197
C
Cabinet design and installation conditions of the machine tool
magnetic, 10
Connection to CNC peripherals, 208

Connection to control unit, 114
Cabinet exterior environmental requirements, 7
Connection to input unit (A14B0076B411), 111
Cabinet leadin for standalone cabinet A, 67
Connection to input units (A14B0076B004, B005, and

B008), 105
Cable clamp and shield processing, 37
Connection to the control unit, 109
Cable connection [Connection to the input unit

(A02B0075J141, J142, J144, and J145), 116
Connection with a floppy disk unit for unit FANUC series 15B
(MMCII), 287
Cable leadin for additional cabinet A, 69
Connection with a hard disk unit for FANUC series 15B

(MMCII), 283
Cable leadin for standalone cabinet B, 68

Cable leadindiagram, 47
Configuration, 4
Connection with a printer using the centronics interface for

FANUC series 15B (MMCII), 279
Configuration and installation of the control unit, 40
Connection with an extension adapter unit for FANUC series

15B (MMCII), 281
Configuration of control unit connectors, 47

Connecting connection unit 1 and connection unit 2, 149
Connection with an external device using the RS422 interface

for series 15B (MMCII), 277
Connecting input power source, 135
Connection with the FANUC handy file, 233
Connecting signal cables, 138
Connector layout for operators panel connection unit, 179
Connecting the connection unit, 147
Connector pin assignment for the connection unit, 154
Connecting the power supply unit, 97
Control unit, 40, 84
Connecting with I/O modules, 141
Cooling by heat exchanger, 13
Connection between the control unit and additional locker, 88
Cooling fin A/B/C, 16
i1
INDEX
B62073E/04
Correspondence between I/O signals and address in a module,

145
Input signal regulations for the operators panel connection

unit, 176
CRT/MDI unit interface, 209
Input unit layout, 105, 110, 115

Installation, 6, 24
Installation conditions of the CNC inside cabinet and servo unit,
8
Installing the heat exchanger, 16
Details of machine side connection of source output operators

panel connection unit, 199
Interface between MMCIII board and option 1 board (video

signal), 228
Details of the connection between the connection unit and the

machine, 156
Interface between MMCIV board and option 1 board (video

signal), 225
Details of the connection between the operators panel

connection unit and the machine, 181
Digital input/output module, 143
DNC interface, 248
Keyboard interface, 226
DNC1 interface, 248

DNC2 interface (RS232C), 250
DNC2 interface (RS422), 251
L
Linear scale interface (A/B/Z signal interface), 269
Linear scale interface (serial interface), 271
List of external dimensions, 299
Emergency stop signal, 294

Environmental requirements, 7
External dimensions, 302
External dimensions of source output operators panel

connection unit, 206
Maintenance, 27
External view of operators panel connection unit, 188
Maintenance area, 70
External view of the connection unit, 174
Maintenance area for additional cabinet A, 72

Maintenance area for selfstanding A type cabinet, 70
Maintenance area for selfstanding B type cabinet, 71
Manual pulse generator interface, 238

Mounting and dismounting modules, 132
FANUC cassette connection, 232
Noise suppressor, 36
Generalpurpose analog voltage input interface, 274
Number of I/O points for I/O UnitMODEL A, 145
Ground, 31
Grounding, 136
Grounding each unit, 33
Outer dimensions, 132

Outer hard disk interface (MMCIII), 292
Output signal regulations for the connection unit, 153
Heat exchanger for CRT/MDI unit, 21
Output signal regulations for the operators panel connection

unit, 177
Heat loss of each unit, 14
Output signal standard for source output operators panel

connection unit, 192
Highspeed DI signal interface, 244

Hybridcontrol connections, 273
Portable tape reader connection, 231
I/O device interface, 229
Power capacity, 9
Input signal regulations for the connection unit, 151
Power OFF sequence, 104
i2
INDEX
B62073E/04
Power ON sequence, 104
Servo amp interface, 260
Power supply unit and input unit connection, 94
Servo interface, 259
Power supply unit panel layout, 95
Small 19 keyboard interface, 227
PPR connection, 230
Source output operators panel connection unit input signal

standard, 190
Pulse coder interface, 257
Spindle interface, 252

Structure of FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A, 131
R
Remote buffer interface (RS232C), 240
Remote buffer interface (RS422), 242

Replacing the battery, 45
Temperature rise within the cabinet, 13
RS232C serial port, 229
The heat pipe type heat exchanger, 24
RS232C serial port (MMCIII), 290
Thermal design of the cabinet, 13
RS422 serial port, 236
Total connection, 73
Separating signal lines, 30

Serial pulse coder interface, 263
When AC output terminals for which power on/off is controlled

are insufficient, 103
Serial spindle interface ( series), 255
When an input unit is not used, 97
Serial spindle interface (S series spindle), 254
When an input unit is used, 100
i3
Nov., 98
Feb., 95
Feb., 94
Oct., 92
Date
04
03
02
01
Edition
Contents
The following products are added

D FANUC Series 15-TFB
D FANUC Series 15-TTFB
D FANUC Series 15-MFB
D FANUC Series 15-MB (Multiple axis)
Edition
Date
Series 15/150-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (B62073E)
The following products are added

D FANUC Series 150-TB
D FANUC Series 150-TTB
D FANUC Series 15-MB
Correction of errors
FANUC
Revision Record
Contents
No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

15 & 150-Model B Connection Manual (Hardware) GFZ-62073EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

15 & 150-Model B Connection Manual (Hardware) GFZ-62073EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 Model B

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1

CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,

CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

POWER SUPPLY UNIT PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Contents of this manual

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

How this manual is

This manual comprises the following chapters and appendix.

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

This manual can be used with the following models.

FANUC Series 15TB

FANUC Series 15TFB

FANUC Series 15TEDMODEL B4

FANUC Series 15TEEMODEL B4

FANUC Series 15TEFMODEL B4

FANUC Series 15MB

FANUC Series 15MFB

FANUC Series 15MEKMODEL B4

FANUC Series 15MELMODEL B4

FANUC Series 15TTB

FANUC Series 15TTFB

FANUC Series 150TB

FANUC Series 150TTB

FANUC Series 150MB

Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B are as follows.

List of manuals related to Series 15/150MODEL B

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface)

FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)

FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FANUC Series 15MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer)

FANUC Series 15MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)

FANUC PMCMODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language)

FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)

FANUC PMCMODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)

FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA

Conversational Automatic Programming Function

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE

FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)

FANUC Series 15MB OPERATORS MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)

Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine